624123
708
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/718
Next page
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual
in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
9
Appendix
Index
table of contents
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Diesel engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGS,
CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this
manual. These were prepared to
enhance your personal safety. You
should carefully read and follow ALL
procedures and recommendations
provided in these WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS and NOTICES.
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provid-
ed.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
Introduction
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you to use unleaded
gasoline which complies with EN 228
and has an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI
(Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher. You
may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI 87-
90 but it may result in slight perform-
ance reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an Octane
Rating of RON (Research Octane
Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline.
When you are going to use leaded
gasoline, we recommend that you
ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your
vehicle is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL.The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental
to the catalytic converter and
will damage the engine control
system’s oxygen sensor and
affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been speci-
fied (We recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.)
WARNING
Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
Introduction
41
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding
fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in
your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Discontinue use
of any gasohol product which
impairs drivability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any per-
formance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines meet Europe
Fuel standards (EN228) or equiva-
lents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel addi-
tives regularly, and have problems
starting or the engine does not run
smoothly, one bottle of additives
added to the fuel tank at every
15,000km (for Europe)/ 5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are avail-
able from your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other addi-
tives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only
on commercially available diesel fuel
that complies with EN 590 or compa-
rable standard. (EN stands for
"European Norm"). Do not use
marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or
non-approved fuel additives, as this
will increase wear and cause dam-
age to the engine and fuel system.
The use of non-approved fuels and /
or fuel additives will result in a limita-
tion of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is
used in your vehicle. If two types of
diesel fuel are available, use summer
or winter fuel properly according to
the following temperature conditions.
Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type
diesel fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very
carefully : If the engine stops through
fuel failure, the circuits must be com-
pletely purged to permit restarting.
Introduction
61
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends
of no more than 7% biodiesel, com-
monly known as "B7 Diesel" may be
used in your vehicle if Biodiesel
meets EN 14214 or equivalent spec-
ifications. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). The use of biofuels exceed-
ing 7% made from rapeseed methyl
ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester
(FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceed-
ing 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the
engine and fuel system. Repair or
replacement of worn or damaged
components due to the use of non
approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make
it necessary to drain it out and
to bleed the lines to avoid jam-
ming the injection pump and
damaging the engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the
regulated automotive diesel fuel
for diesel vehicle equipped with
the DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including
high sulfur (more than 50 ppm
sulfur) and unspecified addi-
tives, it can cause the DPF sys-
tem to be damaged and white
smoke can be emitted.
CAUTION
Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or other-
wise, that fails to meet the lat-
est petroleum industry speci-
fication.
Never use any fuel additives
or treatments that are not rec-
ommended or approved by the
vehicle manufacturer.
17
Introduction
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
Do not race the engine.
While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-
tion.
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correct-
ly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as con-
ventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in section 5 of
this manual.
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview (I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Interior overview (II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
2. Front windshield wiper blades . . . . . . 7-46
3. Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4. Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
5. Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
6. Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
7. Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
8. Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51, 8-4
ONCEIN2001
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Front view
23
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
2. Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
3. Parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4. Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
5. Towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6. Rear combination lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
7. Rear window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
8. High mounted stop lamp . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
9. Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
ONCEIN2002
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Rear view
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
1. Driver position memory system
button ..................................................3-9
2. Inside door handle ............................4-19
3. Outside rearview mirror folding ........4-58
4. Outside rearview mirror control ........4-57
5. Power window lock button ................4-34
6. Central door lock switch ....................4-20
7. Power window switch ........................4-32
8. Fuel-filler lid opener ..........................4-38
9. Instrument panel illumination
control knob ......................................4-62
10. DBC button......................................5-55
11. ESC OFF button..............................5-49
12. Headlight leveling device ..............4-130
13. Active ECO button ..........................5-72
14. LDWS button ..................................5-68
15. AC inverter button..........................4-181
16. 4WD LOCK button ..........................5-26
17. Steering wheel ................................4-46
18. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever ....................................4-47
19. Inner panel fuse panel.................... 7-67
20. Hood release lever ..........................4-36
21. Seat ..................................................3-2
ODMEIN2900
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
1. Cigarette lighter ..............................4-177
2. Power outlet ....................................4-180
3. Seat warmer (front) ..........................3-14
4. SPAS button ....................................4-113
5. Parking assist system button ..........4-105
6. Shift lever ..........................................5-17
7. Cup holder ......................................4-178
8. AUTO HOLD button ..........................5-43
9. EPB switch ........................................5-37
10. Aux, USB and iPod........................4-183
ONCEIN3004
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Lighting control lever ......................4-123
2. Audio remote control buttons ..........4-191
3. Bluetooth hands-free buttons ..........4-241
4. Cruise control button ........................5-60
5. LCD display control buttons ..............4-62
6. Horn ..................................................4-48
7. Driver’s front air bag ..........................3-62
8. Wiper and washer control lever ......4-132
9. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop
button ........................................5-6, 5-10
10. Audio ............................................4-190
11. Hazard warning flasher ................4-122
12. Climate control system ......4-144, 4-155
13. Passenger’s front air bag ................3-63
14. Glove box ......................................4-173
ODM012004
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
27
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-35
2. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-33
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-37
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-41
5. Fuse box............................................7-65
6. Negative battery terminal ..................7-48
7. Positive battery terminal ....................7-48
8. Radiator cap ......................................7-36
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-32
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-38
11. Fuel filter..........................................7-40
ONCEMC3212/ODM012005
Diesel Engine (R2.2)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Gasoline Engine (Lambda II 3.3L) - MPI
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
• Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Headrest (for rear seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Armrest (2nd row seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Seat warmer (for 2nd row seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
• Seat belt warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Lap/shoulder belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• ISOFIX and Tether Anchorage system . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Do not install a child restraint on a
front passenger's seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Air bag warning and indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer* /
Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
2nd row seat
(7) Forward and backward
(8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Walk-in seat lever
(10) Headrest
(11) Armrest
(12) Seat warmer*
3rd row seat
(13) Seatback folding
(14) Headrest
* if equipped
SEATS
ONCESA3001
Manual seat
Power seat
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly
and be sure there are no other
occupants around the seat. If
the seatback is returned with-
out being held and controlled,
the back of the seat could
spring forward resulting in acci-
dental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Do not place anything under the
front seats.
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for front seat
passenger
Riding in a vehicle with a front
seatback reclined could lead to
serious or fatal injury in an acci-
dent. If a front seat is reclined
during an accident, the occu-
pant’s hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt, apply-
ing great force to the unprotect-
ed abdomen. Serious or fatal
internal injuries could result. The
driver must advise the front pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the
seat and passenger.The passen-
ger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt dur-
ing an accident or a sudden
stop. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result because the
seat belt can't operate normally.
WARNING
Occupants should never sit on
seat cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate normally.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked
into place by attempting to
move the seat forward or
reverse without using the lock
release lever. Sudden or unex-
pected movement of the dri-
ver's seat could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
(Continued)
In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel while maintaining com-
fortable control of the vehicle.
It is recommended that your
chest is at least 250 mm (10
inches) away from the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of
control, and an accident caus-
ing death, serious injury, or
property damage.
Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or col-
lision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap
portion of the seat belt snug
and low across the hips. This
is the best position to protect
you in case of an accident.
(Continued)
35
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may gush
out of the lighter and cause fire.
(Continued)
Luggage and other cargo
should be laid flat in the cargo
area or on the folded rear
seatback. If objects are large,
heavy, or must be piled, they
must be secured. Under no
circumstances should cargo
be piled higher than the seat-
backs. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in seri-
ous injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop, colli-
sion or rollover.
WARNING - Rear
seatbacks
The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, pas-
sengers and objects could be
thrown forward resulting in
serious injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or col-
lision.
• No passenger should ride in
the cargo area or sit or lie on
folded seatbacks while the
vehicle is moving. All passen-
gers must be properly seated
in seats and restrained prop-
erly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback
to the upright position, make
sure it is securely latched by
pushing it forward and rear-
wards.
To avoid the possibility of
burns, do not remove the car-
pet in the cargo area. Emission
control devices beneath this
floor generate high tempera-
tures.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Front seat adjustment - Manual
(if equipped)
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat
cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the seat
moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on
the seatback recline lever located
on the outside of the seat at the
rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To change the height of the seat
cushion, push the lever that is locat-
ed on the outside of the seat cushion
upwards or downwards.
To lower the seat cushion, push
down the lever several times.
To raise the seat cushion, pull up
the lever several times.
ONCESA2003
ONCESA2002
ONCESA2004
37
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
result in power seat motor or
electrical component malfunc-
tion.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch
to increase support, or the rear por-
tion of the switch, to decrease sup-
port.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
ONCESA2005
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the ignition OFF.
Children should never be left
unattended in the vehicle.
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Forward and backward
1. Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
1. Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion.
Pull the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the seat cushion.
ONCESA2006 ONCESA2007
ONCDSA2009
ONCDSA3113
39
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the switch.
1. Press the front portion (1) of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion (2) of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
3. Press the upper portion (3) of the
switch to move the support posi-
tion up, or press the lower portion
(4) of the switch, to move the sup-
port position down.
4. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for power seat)
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat and outside rearview mirror
position with a simple button opera-
tion. By saving the desired position
into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the posi-
tion memory will be erased and the
driving position should be restored in
the system.
ONCESA2008
ODM042335
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-
side rearview mirror comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memo-
ry, press the desired memory but-
ton (1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory while sit-
ting in the vehicle. Push the
seat position control switch to
the desired position immediate-
ly if the seat moves too far in
any direction.
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the OFF
position and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
section 4.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps to protect the head and
neck in the event of a collision.
OHM038048N
WARNING
For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is simi-
lar with the height of the top of
their eyes. Also, adjust the
headrest as close to your head
as possible. For this reason,
the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seat-
back is not recommended.
Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as
severe injury to the occupants
may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against neck
injuries when properly adjust-
ed.
Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver's seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Forward and backward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by pulling
the headrest forward to the desired
detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s
furthest backwards position, pull the
headrest to the desired detent while
pushing the release button. Adjust
the headrest so that it properly sup-
ports the head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
ONCESA2016
Type A
Type B
ODMESA2220CN
ONCESA2015
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up
(4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
ONCNSA3150
ONCNSA3152
Type A
Type B
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
ONCNSA3151
ONCNSA3153
Type A
Type B
Safety features of your vehicle
143
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
ODM032014
ODM032016
Type A
Type B
OFFHIGH( )MIDDLE( )LOW( )
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after rein-
stalling and adjusting it properly.
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)
(if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch posi-
tion.
If you want to warm your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (red color).
If you want to cool your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (blue color).
Each time you press the button, the
airflow will change as follows:
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
seat warmer may cause burns
even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods of
time. In particular, the driver
must exercise extreme care for
the following types of passen-
gers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or
hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
ODM032018
OFFHIGH( )MIDDLE( )LOW( )
CAUTION
When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
Safety features of your vehicle
163
• The seat warmer (with air ventila-
tion) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
Rear seat adjustment
Forward and backward
(2nd row seat)
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
OCM030052
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and injure
vehicle occupants.
ODM032019
ONCESA3113L
7-seater
6-seater
CAUTION
When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the
seat warming components
could occur.
317
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
(2nd row seat)
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-
back of the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
ODM032020
ONCESA3125L
7-seater
6-seater
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Walk-in seat
(2nd row seat, if equipped)
To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,
1. Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guide clip.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the
2nd row seatback.
3.The 2nd row seatback will be fold-
ed and push the seat to the far-
thest forward position.
After getting in or out, slide the 2nd
row seat to the farthest rearward
position and pull the seatback firmly
backward until it clicks into place.
Make sure that the seat is locked in
place.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
ODM032055
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down
rear seatbacks is to allow you to
carry longer objects that could
not be accommodated in the
cargo area.
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seat-
back while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This is not a proper seating
position and no seat belts are
available for use. This could
result in serious injury or death
in case of an accident or sud-
den stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should
not extend higher than the top
of the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide for-
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.
ONCDSA2114
ODM032021
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust while
the vehicle is moving or the 2nd
row seat is occupied as the seat
may suddenly move and cause
the passenger on the seat to be
injured.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2nd row seat
ODM032034/OXM039030/ODM032027/ODM032035
3rd row seat
Safety features of your vehicle
203
4.For 2nd row seat -
Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle. When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
For 3rd row seat -
Pull the strap. When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
2nd row seat
3rd row seat
ODM032028/ONCDSA2100/ODM032030/ONCDSA2102
321
Safety features of your vehicle
5.For 2nd row seat -
To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
For 3rd row seat -
To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the strap.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
2nd row seat folding
(from outside, if equipped)
Pull the 2nd row seat back folding
lever out.
The 2nd row seat back will be folded.
If you pull the left side lever (1) out,
left side seat back and center seat
back will be folded.
If you pull the right side lever (2) out,
right side seat back will be folded.
ONCDSA3116
WARNING - Rear seat
folding
Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &
3rd row seats), if passengers,
pets or luggage are in the rear
seats.
It may cause injury or damage
to passengers, pets, luggage.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
To fold down the rear center seat-
back (for 2nd row seat)
1. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2. Push the center seatback folding
lever up, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
WARNING - 2nd row cen-
ter seat folding
Do not fold the 2nd row center
seat, if the occupants in the
3rd row seats, It may cause
the injury to occupants by the
seat device.
If occupants in the 3rd row
seats, Fix the upright position
of the 2nd row center seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The 2nd row center seat back
does not fix when it is folded.
If you use the 2nd row center
seat back folding function to
carry long objects, you should
fix the long object to prevent it
from being thrown about the
vehicle in a collision and
causing injury to vehicle
occupants.
ONCESA3117L
323
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects in the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seats, since they
cannot be properly secured and
may hit the front seat occupants
in a collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park),
and the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if the shift lever is inad-
vertently moved to another posi-
tion.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seatbacks to the
upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the
rear seat belt guides will help
keep the belts from being trapped
behind or under the seats.
CAUTION - Damaging
rear seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seatback, insert
the buckle in the pocket between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly. If
the seatback is returned with-
out holding it, the back of the
seat could spring forward
resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position
(1).
OHM038049N
WARNING
For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is simi-
lar with the height of the top of
their eyes. Also adjust the
headrest as close to your head
as possible. For this reason,
the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seat-
back is not recommended.
Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Severe injury to an occupant
may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against severe
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
ONCDSA3121
ODMESA2222CN
2nd row seat
3rd row seat
325
Safety features of your vehicle
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go.
2. Press the release button (1) while
pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
ONCDSA3120
ODMESA2224CN
2nd row seat
3rd row seat
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Armrest (2nd row seat)
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Seat warmer
(if equipped, for 2nd row seat)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
ODM032026
OUN026140
WARNING
If the tailgate is pushed down to
close it when a passenger's
head is not against a properly
adjusted headrest or a tall per-
son is seated, the tailgate may
hit the occupant's head, which
could cause injury.
ODM032025
ONCESA3108L
7-seater
6-seater
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Each time you press the button,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
OFF HIGH( ) LOW( )
CAUTION - Seat damage
When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers on the seats while the
seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
(Continued)
Avoid wearing twisted seat
belts. A twisted belt can't do
its job as well. In a collision, it
could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is
straight and not twisted.
Be careful not to damage the
belt webbing or hardware. If
the belt webbing or hardware
is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or
the pelvis, chest and shoulders,
as applicable; wearing the lap
section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted
as firmly as possible, consis-
tent with comfort, to provide the
protection for which they have
been designed.
(Continued)
WARNING
For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the
car is moving.
Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated in
the front seat, he/she must be
properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as
possible.
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly posi-
tioned shoulder belt can cause
serious injuries in a crash. The
shoulder belt should be posi-
tioned midway over your shoul-
der across your collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
A slack belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing
with polishes, oils and chemi-
cals, and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be
carried out using mild soap and
water.
The belt should be replaced if
webbing becomes frayed, con-
taminated or damaged. It is
essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn
in a severe impact even if dam-
age to the assembly is not obvi-
ous. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each seat
belt assembly must only be
used by one occupant; it is dan-
gerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the occu-
pant's lap.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Type A
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch ON
regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
after the ignition switch is ON, the
seat belt warning light blinks again
for approximately 6 seconds.
1GQA2083
WARNING
No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
When you fasten the seat belt,
be careful not to latch the seat
belt in buckles of other seat. It's
very dangerous and you may
not be protected by the seat
belt properly.
Do not unfasten the seat belt
and do not fasten and unfas-
ten the seat belt repeatedly
while driving. This could
result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property
damage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt
does not pass over objects that
are hard or can break easily.
Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
or if it is unfastened after the ignition
switch is ON, the seat belt warning
chime will sound for approximately 6
seconds. At this time, if the seat belt
is fastened, the chime will stop at
once. (if equipped)
Type B
As a reminder to the driver, the dri-
ver’s seat belt warning lights will illu-
minate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
or if it is disconnected after the igni-
tion switch is turned ON, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate until
the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 9 km/h, the
illuminated warning light will start to
blink until you drive under 6 km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20 km/h (12
mph) the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
B180A01NF
1
2
331
Safety features of your vehicle
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of 4 positions
for maximum comfort and safety.
If the height of the seat belt is too
near your neck, you will not be get-
ting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
OCM030026
Front seat
WARNING
Verify the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position
at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious
injuries in an accident.
Failure to replace seat belts
after an accident could leave
you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protec-
tion in the event of another
collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) in the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
B200A01NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt
portion as low as possible and
snugly across your hips, not on
your waist. If the lap belt is locat-
ed too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or
over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as
shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under
the arm nearest the door.
ODM032051 B210A01NF
1
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when
not in use.
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides
will help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
ODM032034
OXM039030
2nd row seat
3rd row seat (if equipped)
ODM032027
ODM032035
2nd row seat
3rd row seat (if equipped)
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it
is stored in the guides, it may
damage the guides and/or belt
webbing.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
activated, where the frontal collision
is severe enough, together with the
air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt. (if equipped)
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
The retractor pre-tensioner will
activate not only in a frontal colli-
sion but also in a side collision or
rollover, if the vehicle is equipped
with a side or curtain air bag.
The EFD will activate not only in a
frontal collision but also in rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a side
or curtain air bag.
NOTICE - without rollover
sensor
The retractor pre-tensioner will acti-
vate not only in a frontal collision but
also in a side collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with a side or curtain air
bag.
The EFD will activate in a frontal
collision.
ODMESA2023
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or
twisted and always sit properly
on your seat.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
(if equipped)
NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro-
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tension-
er seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS
air bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned to
the "ON" position, and then it
should turn off.
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit
from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seatbelt must be working
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read
and follow all of the important
information and precautions
about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including
seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts
properly.
OMD030051N-1
Safety features of your vehicle
363
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is
not working properly, the SRS
air bag warning light will illumi-
nate even if there is no malfunc-
tion of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light blinks
or does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to ON, or if
it remains illuminated after illu-
minating for approximately 6
seconds, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners seat belts sys-
tems are designed to operate
only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must
be replaced. All seat belts, of
any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several min-
utes after they have been acti-
vated.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assemblies,
and failure to heed the warn-
ings not to strike, modify,
inspect, replace, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious
injury.
Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded,
we recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use
of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the Safety
Standards of your country. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Safety Standards of
your country. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle
must wear their seat belts at all
times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce the risk of seri-
ous or fatal injuries for all occu-
pants in the event of a collision
or sudden stop. Without a seat
belt, occupants could be shifted
too close to a deploying air bag,
strike the interior structure or be
thrown from the vehicle.
Properly worn seat belts greatly
reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in
this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle
needs to be properly restrained
at all times, including infants
and children. Never hold a child
in your arms or lap when riding
in a vehicle. The violent forces
created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the inte-
rior. Always use a child restraint
appropriate for your child's
height and weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occu-
py the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened snug on the hips
and as low as possible. Check belt fit
periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are afforded the most safety in the
event of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recom-
mended for pregnant women to
lessen the chance of injury in an
accident. When a seat belt is used,
the lap belt portion should be placed
as low and snugly as possible on the
hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
If seat belts are not properly
worn and adjusted on chil-
dren, there is a risk of death or
serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the
safety belt over the area of the
abdomen where the fetus is
located or above the abdomen
where the belt could crush the
fetus during an impact.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front seats
should be in an upright position when
the car is moving. A seat belt cannot
provide proper protection if the person
is lying down in the rear seat or if the
front seat is in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
The protection of your restraint
system (seat belts and air bags)
is greatly reduced by reclining
your seat. Seat belts must be
snug against your hips and
chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined,
the greater the chance that an
occupant's hips will slide under
the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occu-
pant's neck could strike the
shoulder belt. Drivers and pas-
sengers should always sit well
back in their seats, properly
belted, and with the seatbacks
upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seat-
back to its upright position after
the rear seatback was folded
down, be careful not to damage
the seat belt webbing or buckle.
Be sure that the webbing or
buckle does not get caught or
pinched in the rear seat. A seat
belt with damaged webbing or
buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a col-
lision or sudden stop, resulting
in serious injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts
be inspected periodically for wear or
damage of any kind. Any damaged
parts should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children not in a child restraint
should use one of the seat belts pro-
vided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap
belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether
anchor and/or ISOFIX anchors (if
equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured.
For small children and babies, a child
seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child
restraint system, make sure it fits
your car seat and seat belts, and fits
your child. Follow all the instructions
provided by the manufacturer when
installing the child restraint system.
The rear seats have to be moved to
their rearmost position when using
Child Restraint System.
(Continued)
• A seat belt or child restraint
system can become very hot
if it is left in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day, even if the
outside temperature does not
feel hot. Be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
When the child restraint sys-
tem is not in use, store it in
the luggage area or fasten it
with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in the
case of a sudden stop or an
accident.
Children may be seriously
injured or killed by an inflating
air bag. All children, even
those too large for child
restraints, must ride in the
rear seat.
WARNING
A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. Should an accident
occur and cause the passen-
ger side air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat. Thus only
use a child restraint in the
rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
423
WARNING
To reduce a risk of serious or
fatal injuries:
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear
seat. A child riding in the
front passenger seat can be
forcefully struck by an inflat-
ing air bag resulting in seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
Always follow the instructions
for installation and use of the
child restraint maker.
Always make sure the child
seat is secured properly in the
car and your child is securely
restrained in the child seat.
Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a
vehicle.The violent forces cre-
ated during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the
car’s interior.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never put a seat belt over
yourself and a child. During a
crash, the belt could press
deep into the child causing
serious internal injuries.
Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle – not even
for a short time. The car can
heat up very quickly, resulting
in serious injuries to children
inside. Even very young chil-
dren may inadvertently cause
the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or
lock themselves or others
inside the vehicle.
Never allow two children, or
any two persons, to use the
same seat belt.
Children often squirm and
reposition themselves improp-
erly. Never let a child ride with
the shoulder belt under their
arm or behind their back.
Always properly position and
secure children in the rear
seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never allow a child to stand-
up or kneel on the seat or
floorboard of a moving vehi-
cle. During a collision or sud-
den stop, the child can be vio-
lently thrown against the vehi-
cles interior, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
Never use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
security in an accident.
Seat belts can become very
hot, especially when the car is
parked in direct sunlight.
Always check seat belt buck-
les before fastening them
over a child.
After an accident, we recom-
mend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
343
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
CRS09
ODM032059
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
(Continued)
If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint sys-
tem because of the driver's
seat, install the child restraint
system in the rear right seat.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that
an inflating passenger-side air
bag could impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint and kill the
child.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Installing a child restraint system
by lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
WARNING - Child seat
installation
Before installing the child
restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manu-
facturer.
If the seat belt does not oper-
ate as described in this sec-
tion, we recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an acci-
dent.
345
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the
seat belt to take up any slack. After
installation of the child restraint
system, try to move it in all direc-
tions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull
more webbing toward the retractor.
When you unbuckle the seat belt and
allow it to retract, the retractor will
automatically revert back to its nor-
mal seated passenger emergency
locking usage condition.
OEN036104
Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat Position using the Seat Belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate
for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
U : suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass
group
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front
Passenger
2nd
outboard
2nd
Center
3rd outboard
(if equipped)
0 : Up to 10kg
(0-9 months)
UUU U
0 + : Up to 13kg
(0 - 2 years)
UUU U
I : 9 to 18kg
(9 months - 4 years)
UUU U
II : 15 to 25kg U U U U
II & III : 22 to 36kg U U U U
Safety features of your vehicle
463
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
anchor or to a single lower
anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats
may cause the tether or anchor-
age points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the
child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car and the
child is not properly restrained
in the child restraint. Always fol-
low the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions for installation
and use.
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the rear of the seat backs.
1. Route the child restraint seat teth-
er strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the seat.
ODM032037
ONCESA2021
7-seater
6-seater
ONCESA2112
347
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Child
restraint check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING - Child
restraint anchorage
Child restraint anchorages
are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
The tether strap may not work
properly if attached some-
where other than the correct
tether anchor.
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of
fitting child seats that eliminates the
need to use the standard adult seat
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle.
This enables a much more secure
and positive location with the added
benefit of easier and quicker installa-
tion.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed
if it has vehicle-specific approval in
accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R44.
There are ISOFIX symbols located
on the lower portion of each side of
the rear seatbacks. These symbols
indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints so
equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are
equipped with a pair of ISOFIX
anchorages as well as a correspon-
ding top tether anchorage on the
back side of the back rest. The
ISOFIX anchorages are located
between seat cushion and back rest,
marked with the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX con-
necters have to engage with the
vehicles ISOFIX anchorages (listen
for a CLICK, check potential visual
indicators on the CRS and cross-
check by pulling).
OXM039035
ODMESA2004
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
ODM032038
349
Safety features of your vehicle
CRS with universal approval to ECE-
R 44 need to be fixed additionally
with a top tether strap connected to
the corresponding top tether anchor-
age point in the back rest.
The installing and the use of a child-
seat has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to
the ISOFIX-seat.
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat
to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the
child restraint seat latch into the
ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audi-
ble “click” sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the child restraint hook holder and
tighten to secure the seat. (Refer
to the previous page.)
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat
fully rearward against the seat-
back with the seatback reclined
two positions from the most
upright latched position.
WARNING
When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a
child restraint system in the
rear seat, all unused vehicle
rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent
the child from reaching and
taking hold of unretracted
seat belts. Unlatched metal
latch plates or tabs may allow
the child to reach the unre-
tracted seat belts which may
result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the lower anchors.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt
webbing to get scratched or
pinched by the ISOFIX-seat
latch and ISOFIX anchor during
installation.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
(Continued)
Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child
restraint lower anchorage
point. The improper increased
load may cause the anchor-
age points or tether anchor to
break, causing serious injury
or death.
Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible child restraint
seat only to the appropriate
locations shown in the illus-
tration.
Always follow the installation
and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the
child restraint.
WARNING
Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear
seat using the vehicle's
ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX
anchors are only provided for
the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Do not
misuse the ISOFIX anchors by
attempting to attach a child
restraint seat in the middle of
the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint
seat ISOFIX attachments may
not be strong enough to
secure the child restraint seat
properly in the center of the
rear seat and may break, caus-
ing serious injury or death.
(Continued)
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of
universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-
tem in this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the
foremost position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS
(height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface
Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
Mass Group Size Class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Position
Front
Passenger
2nd
Outboard
2nd
Center
3rd
Outboard
3rd
Center
Other
Sites
Carrycot
F ISO/L1 ××××××
G ISO/L2 ××××××
0: up to 10kg E ISO/R1 × IUF ××××
0+: up to 13kg
E ISO/R1 × IUF ××××
D ISO/R2 × IUF ××××
C ISO/R3 × IUF ××××
I: 9 to 18kg
D ISO/R2 × IUF ××××
C ISO/R3 × IUF ××××
BISO/F2×IUF××××
B1 ISO/F2X × IUF ××××
AISO/F3×IUF××××
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Seating Position
Front 2nd Row 3rd Row
Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right
Group 0+ Maxi Cosi Cabriofix B___ N/A Pass Pass *Pass Pass Pass N/A Pass
Group I
Roemer King (Belt mounted) B___ N/A Pass Pass *Pass Pass Pass N/A Pass
Roemer Duo Plus _I_S N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Group II / III Roemer KidFix B___ N/A Pass Pass *Pass Pass Pass N/A Pass
Group 0+
Maxi Cosi Cabriofix
Plus Easybase2
B_L_ N/A Pass Pass *Pass Pass Pass N/A Pass
Maxi Cosi Cabriofix
Plus Easyfix
_IL_ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Group 0+/ I HTS iZi Kid X3 _IL_ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Group I
Maxi Cosi Pearl
Plus Familyfix
_IL_ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Group II / III Roemer KidFix BI__ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Q1.5 U/SU
Britax Roemer BABY
-SAFE Plus ISOFIX
_IL_ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Q3 U/SU
Maxi Cosi Pearl
Plus Familyfix
_IL_ N/A Exempt Pass *Exempt Pass Exempt N/A Exempt
Top Pick Child Restraint System – For Europe
B = Belted, I = ISOFIX, L = Support leg, S = Strap/Top-tether
*Pass, *Exempt : N/A 6 seater, only for 7 seater
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems - For Europe
CRS Manufacturer information
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Mass Group
Name
Part. No.
Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0-1
(0-18kg)
Baby Safe Plus
Part. No. E8945-66001
Part. No. E8945-66029
Britax Römer Rearward facing with ISOFIX Base E1 04301146
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Duo Plus
Part. No. E8945-66011
Britax Römer
Forward facing with vehicle ISOFIX lower
anchorage + Top Tether
E1 04301133
Safety features of your vehicle
543
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Driver’s knee air bag*
(6) Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch*
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
ODM032052/ODMESA2008
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* 3rd row seat : if equipped
355
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side impact
air bag or curtain air bag) in order
to help protect the occupants from
serious physical injury.
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
Also, the air bags inflate instantly in
the event of a rollover (if equipped
with a side air bag or curtain air bag)
in order to help protect the occu-
pants from serious physical injury.
There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/inflation signal.
Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determin-
ing, factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which a
collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu-
pant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering wheel.
WARNING
To avoid severe personal
injury or death caused by
deploying air bags in a colli-
sion, the driver should sit as
far back from the steering
wheel air bag as possible (at
least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passenger
should always move their seat
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
with both the seat belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your
doors and/or windows as soon as
possible after impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to the smoke
and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult
the doctor if the symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger seat
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the
air bag related parts in the
steering wheel and/or instru-
ment panel and/or in both sides
of the roof rails above the front
and rear doors are very hot. To
prevent injury, do not touch the
air bag storage areas internal
components immediately after
an air bag has inflated.
OYDESA2042
OLM034310
Type A
Type B
(Continued)
Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passen-
gers may be injured by the air
bag expansion force if they
are not in a proper position.
Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or
bodily abrasions, injuries
from broken glasses or burns.
357
Safety features of your vehicle
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, you can activate or deactivate
the front passenger’s air bag when
necessary.
Air bag warning and indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
WARNING
NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat pro-
tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG
in front of it, DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
• Never put a child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat. If
the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious
or fatal injuries.
When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats of
vehicle equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags, be
sure to install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain
air bags could cause serious
injury or death to an infant or
child.
W7-147
Safety features of your vehicle
583
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the warning light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
Have the system checked if:
The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator (if equipped)
The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator illumi-
nates for approximately 4
seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON
indicator also comes on when the
passenger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position and
goes off after approximately 60 sec-
onds.
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air
bag OFF indicator illumi-
nates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator also comes on when the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position and
goes off when the passenger’s front
air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position.
ODMESA2002
ODMESA2005
359
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and func-
tions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Front impact sensors
3. Passenger's front air bag module*
4. Pretensioner seatbelt systems*
5. Side impact sensors*
6. Curtain air bag modules*
7. Side air bag modules*
8. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor*
9. Air bag warning light
10. Passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator (front passenger's seat
only)*
11. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch*
12. Driver’s knee air bag module*
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
elements while the ignition switch is
ON to determine if a frontal or near-
frontal impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-
tensioner seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
after which the air bag warning light
should go out.
ODM029200A
10
10
11
11
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions,
the passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator will not illuminate
(The passenger's front air bag
ON indicator comes on and goes
off after approximately 60 sec-
onds) and the passenger’s front
air bag will inflate in a frontal
impact even if the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch is
set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch and the SRS
air bag system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
12
12
Safety features of your vehicle
603
The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel, in the front passenger's panel
above the glove box and/or in the dri-
ver’s side knee bolster. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
WARNING
If any of the following condi-
tions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the SRS. We rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The light does not turn on
briefly when you turn the igni-
tion ON.
The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately 6
seconds.
The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
The light blinks when the igni-
tion switch is in ON position.
OHM039103N
Driver’s front air bag (2)
OHM039102N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
361
Safety features of your vehicle
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OHM039104N
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
Do not install or place any
accessories (drink holder, CD
holder, sticker, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box in a vehicle with
a passenger's air bag. Such
objects may become danger-
ous projectiles and cause
injury if the passenger's air
bag inflates.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When installing a container of
liquid air freshener inside the
vehicle, do not place it near
the instrument cluster nor on
the instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
WARNING
If an air bag deploys, there
may be a loud noise followed
by a fine dust released in the
vehicle. These conditions are
normal and are not hazardous
- the air bags are packed in this
fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment
may cause skin or eye irrita-
tion as well as aggravate asth-
ma for some persons. Always
wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag)
System and lap/shoulder belts at
both the driver and passenger seat-
ing positions.
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and/or on the
cover of the driver’s side knee bolster
located below the steering wheel and
the passenger's side front panel pad
above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel, in the
knee bolster below the steering
wheel column and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
(Continued)
The SRS can function only
when the ignition key is in the
"ON" position. If the SRS air
bag warning light blinks or
does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illu-
minating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position, or
after the engine is started,
comes on while driving, the
SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Before you replace a fuse or
disconnect a battery terminal,
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and remove
the ignition key. Never remove
or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
ODM032040
ODM032041
Driver’s front air bag
Driver’s knee air bag
363
Safety features of your vehicle
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity.
ODM032042
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every
time, everyone! Air bags inflate
with considerable force and in
the blink of an eye. Seat belts
help keep occupants in proper
position to obtain maximum
benefit from the air bag. Even
with air bags, improperly and
unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air
bag inflates. Always follow the
precautions about seat belts, air
bags and occupant safety con-
tained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries and receive the
maximum safety benefit from
your restraint system:
Never place a child in any
child or booster seat in the
front seat.
ABC – Always Buckle
Children in the back seat. It is
the safest place for children of
any age to ride.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front and side air bags can
injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air
bags, while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
You and your passengers
should never sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the air
bags. Improperly positioned
drivers and passengers can
be severely injured by inflat-
ing air bags.
Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in
an upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator is illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a mod-
erate or severe frontal crash.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
643
(Continued)
The SRS is designed to
deploy the front air bags only
when an impact is sufficiently
severe and when the impact
angle is less than 30° from the
forward longitudinal axis of
the vehicle. Additionally, the
air bags will only deploy once.
Seat belts must be worn at all
times.
Front air bags are not intend-
ed to deploy in side-impact,
rear-impact or rollover crash-
es. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal
crashes below the deploy-
ment threshold.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front
seat. The infant or child could
be severely injured or killed
by an air bag deployment in
case of an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags
to deploy.
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment
of the air bags or by rendering
the SRS inoperative.
If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, we rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air bags can only be used
once – we recommend that the
system be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he or she
must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
For maximum safety protec-
tion in all types of crashes, all
occupants including the driv-
er should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at
their seating position to mini-
mize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the air
bag while the vehicle is in
motion.
(Continued)
365
Safety features of your vehicle
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front
air bag ON/OFF switch if a child
restraint is installed on the front pas-
senger's seat or if the front passen-
ger's seat is unoccupied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child,
the passenger’s front air bag must be
deactivated when it should be neces-
sary to install a rearward facing child
seat on the front passenger seat in
exceptional circumstances.
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front
air bag, insert the mechanical key
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the
OFF position.
(Continued)
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
with the seat back in an
upright position, centered on
the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an
occupant is out of position
because of not wearing a seat
belt, the air bag may forcefully
contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.
ODMESA2008
ODMESA2006
ODMESA2005
Safety features of your vehicle
663
The passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay
on until the passenger’s front air bag
is reactivated.
To reactivate the passenger’s front
air bag, insert the mechanical key
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON
position. The passenger’s front air
bag OFF indicator will go out and the
passenger’s front air bag ON indica-
tor ( ) will illuminate for approxi-
mately 60 seconds.
NOTICE
When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON
position, the passenger’s front air
bag is activated and child or infant
seat should not be installed on the
front passenger seat.
When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position, the passenger’s front air
bag is deactivated.
WARNING
On some models, the front air
bag ON/OFF switch could turn
by using a similar small rigid
device. Always check the status
of the front air bag ON/OFF
switch and passenger's front air
bag ON/OFF indicator.
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning
light
()
on the instrument
panel will illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air
bag OFF indicator
()
will not
illuminate (The passenger's
front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds),
the SRS Control Module reac-
tivates the passenger’s front
air bag and the passenger’s
front air bag will inflate in
frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the
OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
367
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
If the SRS air bag warning
light blinks or does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position,
or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, we
recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passen-
ger's front air bag ON/OFF
switch, do not install a child
restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A child
restraint system must never
be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems
should always occupy the
rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. Children
are afforded the most safety
in the event of an accident
when they are restrained by a
proper restraint system in the
rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is
no longer needed on the front
passenger's seat, reactivate
the front passenger's air bag.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for
the proper position of the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch.
Deactivate the passenger's
front air bag only when the
ignition switch is switched off,
or the malfunction may occur
in the SRS Control Module.
And there may be a danger
that the driver's and/or front
passenger’s and/or side and
curtain air bag may fail to trig-
ger, or not trigger correctly
during a collision.
Never install a rearward fac-
ing child seat on the front pas-
senger's seat unless the pas-
senger's front air bag has
been deactivated. The infant
or child could be severely
injured or killed by an air bag
deployment in case of an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
683
Side impact air bag
(if equipped)
The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro-
vide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional pro-
tection than that offered by the seat
belt alone.
The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy only during cer-
tain side-impact collisions, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle,
speed and point of impact. The side
air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
The side impact air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact but
also on the opposite side.
WARNING
The side impact air bag is
supplemental to the driver's
and the passenger's seat belt
systems and is not a substi-
tute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in
motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact or
rollover* conditions severe
enough to cause significant
injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
For best protection from the
side impact air bag system
and to avoid being injured by
the deploying side impact air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belt properly
fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions. The passenger's
arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
ODM032043
OHM032071
369
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
(Continued)
Do not use any accessory
seat covers.
Use of seat covers could
reduce or prevent the effec-
tiveness of the system.
Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side
impact air bag.
Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between
the front door and the front
seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the
supplemental side impact air
bag inflates.
To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal
injury, avoid impact to the side
impact sensor when the igni-
tion key is on.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*: Only vehicle is equipped with rollover sensor.
ODM032056
OHM032072
Safety features of your vehicle
703
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact col-
lisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact.
The curtain air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact but
also on the opposite side.
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
Also, both sides of the side impact
air bags and curtain air bags deploy
in certain rollover situations.
The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impacts.
(Continued)
Do not allow the passengers
to lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with
side and/or curtain air bags.
Never try to open or repair any
components of the side cur-
tain air bag system. We rec-
ommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle
occupants in an accident.
WARNING
• In order for side impact and
curtain air bags to provide the
best protection, both front
seat occupants and both out-
board rear occupants should
sit in an upright position with
the seat belts properly fas-
tened.
Importantly, children should
sit in a proper child restraint
system in the rear seat.
When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and secure the child restraint
system in a locked position.
(Continued)
371
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module /
Rollover sensor (if equipped)
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
(4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
ONCESA2105/ODM032045/ONCDSA3123/ODM032047/ODM032048
1
2
3 4
Safety features of your vehicle
723
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
WARNING - if equipped
with rollover sensor
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to OFF or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignition is
ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a rollover.
WARNING
Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal
injury or death.
If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death. Therefore, do
not try to perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors. We recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Problems may arise if the sen-
sor installation angles are
changed due to the deforma-
tion of the front bumper, body,
front door or B pillar and C pil-
lars where side collision sen-
sors are installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
We recommend that the sys-
tem be serviced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Your vehicle has been
designed to absorb impact
and deploy the air bag(s) in
certain collisions. Installing
bumper guards or replacing a
bumper with non-genuine
parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
1VQA2084
373
Safety features of your vehicle
The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and/or curtain air bags
are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision
sensors depending on the strength,
speed or angles of impact resulting
from a side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate only in frontal col-
lisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient impact.
Side air bags (side impact and/or
curtain air bags) are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions,
but they may inflate in other colli-
sions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
Also, the side impact and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate when a
rollover is detected by a rollover sen-
sor.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
1VQA2086
OVQ036018N
OHM032072
Safety features of your vehicle
743
Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
However, if equipped with side
impact and curtain air bags, the air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles
of impact.
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any addition-
al benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
OUN036087 1VQA2089OVQ036018N
375
Safety features of your vehicle
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
NOTICE - if equipped with
rollover sensor
However, if equipped with side
impact and curtain air bags, the air
bags may inflate in a rollover, when
it is detected by the rollover sensor.
NOTICE - without rollover
sensor
However, side and/or curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact colli-
sion, if the vehicle is equipped with
side impact air bags and curtain air
bags.
1VQA2090 1VQA2091
Safety features of your vehicle
763
Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as util-
ity poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area
and the full force of the impact is not
delivered to the sensors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you
can safely service by yourself. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate, or continuously remains
on, we recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1VQA2092
WARNING
Modification to SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure,
can adversely affect SRS per-
formance and lead to possible
injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad
covers, use only a soft, dry
cloth or one which has been
moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag
covers and proper deploy-
ment of the system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
inflate.
If the air bags inflate, we rec-
ommend that the system be
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental inflation of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
(Continued)
377
Safety features of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor.
Passengers should not move
out of or change seats while the
vehicle is moving. A passenger
who is not wearing a seat belt dur-
ing a crash or emergency stop can
be thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other occupants,
or out of the vehicle.
Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more
than one person uses the same
seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
Do not use any accessories on
seat belts. Devices claiming to
improve occupant comfort or repo-
sition the seat belt can reduce the
protection provided by the seat belt
and increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
Passengers should not place
hard or sharp objects between
themselves and the air bags.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on
your lap or in your mouth can result
in injuries if an air bag inflates.
Keep occupants away from the
air bag covers. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor. If occupants
are too close to the air bag covers,
they could be injured if the air bags
inflate.
Do not attach or place objects
on or near the air bag covers.
Any object attached to or placed
on the front or side impact air bag
covers could interfere with the
proper operation of the air bags.
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats
could interfere with the operation of
the supplemental restraint system
sensing components or side air
bags.
(Continued)
If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions must
be observed. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal
injury.
If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to
start the engine; we recom-
mend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
783
Do not place items under the
front seats. Placing items under
the front seats could interfere with
the operation of the supplemental
restraint system sensing compo-
nents and wiring harnesses.
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured or killed in the
event of a crash. All infants and
children should be properly
restrained in appropriate child
safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper-
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
tem.
Air bag warning label
(if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached
to alert driver and passengers of
potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warn-
ings focus on the risk of children. We
also want you to be aware of the
risks adults are exposed to which
have been described in previous
pages.
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of
position can cause occupants
to be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
Always sit upright with the
seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and your feet on the floor.
ODMESA2007
Features of your vehicle
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation . . . . . . 4-14
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• From outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• From inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Door lock/unlock features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Non-powered tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Tilt steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Smart parking assist system (SPAS) . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Additional instructions (messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Traffic change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Adaptive front lighting system (AFLS) . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Door courtesy lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• 3
rd
row climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• 3rd row climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
• Multi box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
• Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
• Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4
AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
Aux, USB and iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
4
45
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the
key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you lose
your keys, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. Remove the key code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the key code number and keep it in a
safe place (not in the vehicle).
Key operations
Used to start the engine.
Used to lock and unlock the doors.
Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
KEYS
WARNING
We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. If
an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return
to ON after START. If this hap-
pens, the starter will continue to
operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire
due to excessive current in the
wiring.
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key
(smart key) is dangerous even if
the key is not in the ignition or
start button is ACC or ON posi-
tion. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the
ignition or press the start but-
ton.The ignition key (smart key)
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even
death. Never leave the keys in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
Features of your vehicle
64
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an electronic engine immobilizer sys-
tem to reduce the risk of unautho-
rized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
key and electronic devices inside the
vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key sys-
tem
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
Vehicles with smart key system
Whenever the engine start/stop but-
ton is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
verifies if the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
47
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfuntioin.
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, we recommend that you
consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and we
recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from
normally transmitting.
Features of your vehicle
84
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manual-
ly while pressing the release button.
Type B
To remove the mechanical key,
press and hold the release button
and remove the mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine hood and tail-
gate must be closed).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
ODMECO3030
Type B
ODMECO2028
Type A
ODMECO2027
ODMECO3029
49
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink twice to indicate that all
doors are unlocked.
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock automatically unless a door
is opened within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3)
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the tailgate is
unlocked.
NOTICE
After unlocking the tailgate, the
tailgate will lock automatically
unless it is opened within 30 sec-
onds.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
The word "HOLD" is written on
the button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button.
Features of your vehicle
104
Transmitter precautions
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
The ignition key is in ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating dis-
tance limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a
radio transmitter such as a radio
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, we rec-
ommend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the transmitter is in close prox-
imity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the trans-
mitter could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is
active such as making call, receiv-
ing calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/ receiving emails. Avoid
placing the transmitter and your
cell phone or smart phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the key-
less entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer vehicle war-
ranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inopera-
tive due to changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by
the party responsible for com-
pliance, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
411
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several
years, but if the transmitter or smart
key is not working properly, try
replacing the battery with a new one.
If you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the rear cover.
For transmitter or smart key replace-
ment, we recommend that you see
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
reprogramming.
OHG040009
Type B
OLM042302
Type A
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key
is designed to give you years
of trouble-free use, however it
can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, we recom-
mend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
To avoid damaging the trans-
mitter or smart key, don't drop
it, get it wet, or expose it to
heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Features of your vehicle
124
Smart key function
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Tailgate open
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door and tailgate and even
start the engine without inserting the
key.
The functions of the buttons on a
smart key are similar to the remote
keyless entry. Refer to the “Remote
keyless entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors and tail-
gate.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer
to the following, for more details.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will
blink once (the engine hood and
tailgate must be closed).
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound for
3 seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door or the tailgate is opened.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
ODM042006
ODMECO3030
413
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the front out-
side door handle.
3. All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink twice.
NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the doors.
After unlocking all doors, the
doors will lock automatically
unless a door is opened.
Tailgate unlocking
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the tailgate handle switch.
3.The tailgate will unlock.
NOTICE
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the tailgate handle.
Smart key precautions
NOTICE
If, for some reason, you happen to
lose your smart key, you will not be
able to start the engine. Tow the
vehicle, if necessary, and we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend
that you take the vehicle and key to
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
to protect it from potential theft.
The smart key will not work if any
of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
144
(Continued)
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
When the smart key does not
work properly, open and close the
door with the mechanical key. If
you have a problem with the
smart key, we recommend that
you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proxim-
ity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is
active such as making call, receiv-
ing calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/ receiving emails. Avoid
placing the smart key and your
cell phone or smart phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
doors by using the mechanical key.
1. Press and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical
key (2).
2. Insert the key into the hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the front of the
vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due
to exposure to water or liquids, it
will not be covered by your man-
ufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
ODMECO2029
415
Features of your vehicle
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to
the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and tailgate are
closed and latched.
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handle with the smart key in your
possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If the tailgate or engine hood
remains opened, the hazard
warning lights will not operate
and theft-alarm will not arm. After
this, if the tailgate and engine
hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights will blink once.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
OJC040170
Features of your vehicle
164
Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, tailgate and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and tailgate are
closed and latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine hood
remains opened, the hazard warn-
ing lights will not operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, tailgate and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehi-
cle. If the system is armed while
a passenger(s) remains in the
vehicle, the alarm may be acti-
vated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If
any door, tailgate lid or engine
hood is opened within 30 sec-
onds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
417
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
A front or rear door is opened with-
out using transmitter or smart key.
The tailgate is opened without
using transmitter or smart key.
The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for 27 seconds, unless the system is
disarmed. To turn off the system,
unlock the doors with the transmitter
or smart key.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started.
- The engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position.
After the doors are unlocked, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if
any door (or tailgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
NOTICE
Without smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
With smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, open the door with
the mechanical key and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
If you lose your keys, we recom-
mend that you consult with your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and we
recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
184
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock and toward the front
of the vehicle to unlock.
If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, only the driver’s door
will lock/unlock.
Once the door is unlocked, it may
be opened by pulling the door han-
dle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
Transmitter/Smart key
Doors can be locked and unlocked
with the transmitter or smart key.
Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in
your possession. (vehicles equipped
with smart key system)
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
DOOR LOCKS
ODM042011
ODMECO2035
Type A
Type B
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
419
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in lock position, the button
is unlocked and door opens.
(Except Europe)
If the inner door handle of any door
is pulled when the door lock button
is in lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens. (For
Europe )
Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
(Except Europe)
Doors cannot be locked if the igni-
tion key is in the ignition switch and
any door is opened. (For Europe)
Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is opened.
ODM042013
Lock
Unlock
WARNING
If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
Be careful that someone's
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the door.
Features of your vehicle
204
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central
door lock switch.
• When pushing down on the front
portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will lock.
When pushing down on the rear
portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will unlock.
If the key is in the ignition switch
and a front door is opened, the
doors will not lock when the front
portion (1) of central door lock
switch is pressed. (Except Europe)
If a door is opened, the doors will
not lock when the front portion (1)
of the central door lock switch is
pressed. (For Europe)
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and a door is opened, the doors
will not lock when the front portion
(1) of central door lock switch is
pressed.
NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors
cannot be unlocked with the central
door lock/unlock switch.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows down.
Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
ODM042014
Driver’s door
421
Features of your vehicle
Door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock sys-
tem
All doors will automatically unlock
when an impact causes the air bags
to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "User setting" in this
section.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm,
possibly from someone gaining
entry to the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
224
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the hole (1) and turn it to the
“lock( )” position.When the child
safety lock is in the lock position,
the rear door will not open even
though the inner door handle is
pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
rear door child safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out
and be severely injured or
killed. To prevent children from
opening the rear doors from the
inside, the rear door safety
locks should be used whenever
children are in the vehicle.
ONCNCO2015
423
Features of your vehicle
Non-powered tailgate
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter,
smart key or central door
lock/unlock switch.
Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the trans-
mitter or smart key is pressed for
approximately 1 second, or the tail-
gate handle button is pressed
when the smart key is detected.
If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle and
pulling it up.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate locks
automatically. (All doors must be
locked.)
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
TAILGATE
ONCNCO2002
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your
vehicle. Possible damage may
occur to the tailgate lift cylin-
ders and attaching hardware if
the tailgate is not closed prior to
driving.
Features of your vehicle
244
Closing the tailgate
Lower and push down the tailgate
firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is
securely latched.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tail-
gate opened, keep the air vents
and all windows open so that
additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.To avoid
injury in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stops, occu-
pants should always be proper-
ly restrained.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are
safely out of the way before
closing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
tailgate latch and striker while
closing the tailgate. It may dam-
age the tailgate's latch.
ONCNCO2003
425
Features of your vehicle
Power tailgate (if equipped)
(1) Power tailgate open/close button
(2) Power tailgate handle switch
(3) Power tailgate close button
NOTICE
The power tailgate operates when the
automatic shift lever is in P (Park).
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
tailgate manually. This may
cause damage to the power tail-
gate. If it is necessary to close
or open the power tailgate man-
ually when the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected, do
not apply excessive force.
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power tailgate that could
result in injury to themselves or
others, or damage the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the tailgate
before operating the power tail-
gate. Wait until the tailgate is
opened fully and stopped before
loading or unloading cargo or
passengers from the vehicle.
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
Type A
Type B
ONCNCO2005
ONCNCO2006
Features of your vehicle
264
Opening the tailgate
The power tailgate will open automat-
ically by doing one of the following:
Press the tailgate unlock button on
the transmitter or smart key for
approximately one second.
Press the power tailgate open but-
ton for approximately one second.
Press the tailgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
ONCNCO2005
ONCNCO3044
ONCNCO3045
Type A
Type B
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
Type A
Type B
427
Features of your vehicle
Closing the tailgate
Press the power tailgate close but-
ton for approximately one second
when the tailgate is opened.
The tailgate will close and lock
automatically.
Press the power tailgate close but-
ton for approximately one second
when the tailgate is opened.
The tailgate will close and lock
automatically.
Power tailgate non-opening con-
ditions
The power tailgate will not open or
close automatically, when the vehicle
is moving more than 3km/h (2mph).
WARNING
The chime will sound and the
hazard warning flasher will blink
10 times if you drive with the
tailgate closed but not locked.
Stop your vehicle immediately
at a safe place and check if your
tailgate is securely locked.
WARNING
The chime will sound continu-
ously if you drive over
3km/h(2mph) with the tailgate
opened. Stop your vehicle
immediately at a safe place and
check if your tailgate is opened.
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
Type A
Type B
ONCNCO2006
Features of your vehicle
284
NOTICE
The power tailgate can be operat-
ed when the engine is not running.
However the power tailgate opera-
tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively e.g.:
more than approximately 10 times
repeatedly.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
tailgate in the open position for a
long lime.
Do not modify or repair any part
of the power tailgate by yourself.
We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power tailgate.
This could cause the power tail-
gate to operate improperly.
In cold and wet climates, the
power tailgate may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
Automatic reversal
During power opening and closing if
the power tailgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
tailgate will detect the resistance.
If the resistance is detected while
opening the tailgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
If the resistance is detected while
closing the tailgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the tailgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and rever-
sal may not detect the resistance.
If the automatic reversal feature
operates continuously more than
twice during opening or closing oper-
ation, the power tailgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
tailgate manually and operate the
tailgate automatically again.
ONCNCO2007
WARNING
Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in
the path of the power tailgate to
make sure the automatic rever-
sal operates.
429
Features of your vehicle
How to reset the power tailgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power tailgate to operate normally,
reset the power tailgate as follow:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Press the tailgate handle switch
and tailgate close button at the
same time for more than 3 sec-
onds. (the chime will sound)
3. Close the tailgate manually.
If the power tailgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
If the power tailgate does not oper-
ate normally, first check the follow-
ing condition before using the power
tailgate.
Check if the shift lever is in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle vehicles.
Power tailgate opening height
user setting
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened tailgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Position the tailgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the tailgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the tailgate manually after
hearing the buzzer sound.
The tailgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
ONCNCO2006
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tail-
gate opened, keep the air vents
and all windows open so that
additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident
or sudden stops, occupants
should always be properly
restrained.
Features of your vehicle
304
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadver-
tently locked in the luggage compart-
ment. The tailgate can be opened by
doing as follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
WARNING
For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency tailgate safety
release lever in the vehicle
and how to open the tailgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
ONCNCO2004
431
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OANNCO43005
Features of your vehicle
324
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to oper-
ate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s win-
dow. The driver’s door has a master
power window switch that controls all
the windows in the vehicle. Also, the
driver has a power window lock
switch which can block the operation
of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 seconds period.
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open position), your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch.
If you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
Type A
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
ODM042020
433
Features of your vehicle
Type B
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up the switch
momentarily to the opposite direction
of the window movement.
Type C
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
NOTICE
If the power window does not oper-
ate normally, the automatic power
window system must be reset as fol-
lows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and
continue pulling up the driver’s
power window switch for at least
1 second after the window is com-
pletely closed.
ODM042021
ODMECO2001
Features of your vehicle
344
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature is
only active when the “auto up” fea-
ture is used by fully pulling up the
switch. The automatic reverse fea-
ture will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on
the power window switch.
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers’ doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock posi-
tion (pressed).
When the power window lock switch
is pressed :
The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passenger’s
power window.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
ODM042022
OUN026013
435
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Windows
NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock switch in the LOCK
position (pressed). Serious
injury can result from uninten-
tional window operation by
the child.
Do not extend face or arms
outside the window while
driving.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage
to the power window system,
do not open or close two win-
dows or more at the same
time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door
and the individual door win-
dow switch in opposing direc-
tions at the same time. If this
is done, the window will stop
and cannot be opened or
closed.
Features of your vehicle
364
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push up the sec-
ondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised halfway.
HOOD
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position and setting the
parking brake.
ODM042023
ONCNCO2036
WARNING
When you check the engine
compartment, please make sure
your head is not injured by the
hood safety hook which is
located inside of the hood.
ODMNMC2034
437
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
it down. Make sure the hood is
locked securely
WARNING
Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could fly open while the vehi-
cle is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
WARNING - Hood
Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
Features of your vehicle
384
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel-filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
on the fuel-filler lid opener located on
the driver’s door.
NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the
fuel tank cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. To close the lid, press the edge of
the lid. Make sure it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
ODM042025
ODM042026
WARNING - Refueling
If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
439
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling,
please note the following guide-
lines carefully. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
severe personal injury, severe
burns or death by fire or explo-
sion.
Read and follow all warning
posted at the gas station facil-
ity.
Before refueling note the loca-
tion of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry
and store gasoline.
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
404
Emergency fuel filler lid
release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually.
Remove the panel in the luggage
compartment area. Pull the handle
out slightly.
(Continued)
When refueling, always shut
the engine off. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical compo-
nents related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling is com-
plete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before start-
ing the engine.
DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station
especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
CAUTION
Make sure to refuel your vehi-
cle according to the "Fuel
requirements" suggested in
section 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make
sure that you use parts
designed for replacement in
your vehicle. An incorrect fuel
filler cap can result in a seri-
ous malfunction of the fuel
system or emission control
system. For more detailed
information, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not spill fuel on the exteri-
or surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the
paint.
After refueling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely
to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
compartment area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
ODM042027
441
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed, the warn-
ing chime will sound for approximate-
ly 7 seconds and a message “Sunroof
Open” will appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
ODM042028
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehi-
cle. If the sunroof is opened, rain
or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
ODMEDI2019/ODMEDI2047
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
424
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Press the sunshade open button (1).
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof
glass opened, the sunshade will
be closed halfway.
- Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
ODM042029
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
If you would like to carry items
on the roof using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
When carrying cargo on the
roof, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass
roof.
Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
CAUTION
Do not extend any luggage out
side the sunroof while driving.
CAUTION
Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand. It could cause
sunshade failure.
Close the sunroof when driv-
ing through dusty roads. Dust
may cause a malfunction of
the vehicle system.
443
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunshade and sunroof
glass will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
The front part of the sunroof glass
can only be opened and closed.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide
halfway open then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
ODM042030
ODM042033
Features of your vehicle
444
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or downward. The sunroof
glass sunshade will close automati-
cally.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
OYF049215
WARNING - Sunroof
Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving.
Make sure your hands and
head are safely out of the way
before closing a sunroof.
A panoramic sunroof is made
of glass, therefore it may break
in an accident. If you do not
have your seat belt on, you
may contact the broken glass
and get injured or killed. For all
passengers safety, have the
seat belts on. (ex. seat belt,
CRS, etc.)
445
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
(about 10 seconds) until the sun-
roof moves a little. Then, release
the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunshade and sunroof glass
slide open The sunroof glass
slide close The sunshade close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
CAUTION
Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
Features of your vehicle
464
Electronic power steering
Power steering uses the motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for better control of
the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
The steering effort is high immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
is completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continu-
ously when the vehicle is not in
motion. However, after a few min-
utes, it will return to its normal
conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the Electronic Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise could occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
STEERING WHEEL
447
Features of your vehicle
Tilt steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can also raise it to give
your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3), then
pull up the lock-release lever to lock
the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate and notify you on the
LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
WARNING
Never adjust the angle and
height of steering wheel while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
ODM042036
ODM042342
Features of your vehicle
484
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
ODM042038
449
Features of your vehicle
Flex steering wheel
(if equipped)
The flex steering wheel controls
steering effort as driver's preference
or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the steering mode
button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen.
ODM042039
ODM042044
Type A
Type B
ODM042040
Features of your vehicle
504
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
Comfort mode
The steering effort comes lighter in
comfort mode.
Sport mode
The steering effort becomes heavier.
ODM042041
ODM042045
Type A
Type B
ODM042042
ODM042046
Type A
Type B
ODM042043
ODM042047
Type A
Type B
451
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press
the steering mode button
while operating the steering
wheel, the LCD display will
change, but the steering effort
will not change immediately.
After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
When the electronic power
steering is not working prop-
erly, the flex steering wheel
will not work.
Features of your vehicle
524
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out
the rear window.
ODM042048
Day
Night
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident which
could cause death, serious
injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and do not install a wide mirror.
It could result in injury, during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag.
453
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lights of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions.The
sensor mounted in the mirror senses
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare
is automatically controlled by the sen-
sor mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass
1. Rear light sensor
2. Status indicator LED
3. ECM ON/OFF button
4. Compass button
5. Display window
Automatic dimming rear view mirror
controls automatically the glare of
headlights of the vehicle behind you
when it turned on by pressing the
ECM ON/OFF button. It is turned off
by pressing he ECM ON/OFF button
once more.
ODMECO2003
OMD040032
OMD042122L
Type A
Type B
Rearview display
Indicator Sensor
Indicator
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
Features of your vehicle
544
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the compass but-
ton, then the vehicle's directional
heading will be displayed. Pressing
and releasing the button again will
turn off the display.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds. When
the compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less
than 8km/h 2 times or until the com-
pass heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed
direction and opposite direction are
possible, and if the calibration is
completed, the compass heading
will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a com-
pass heading appears.
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and
variance zone number on the zone
map.
B520C01JM
Europe
B520C05JM
Africa
455
Features of your vehicle
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds.
The current zone number will
appear in the display.
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button
in, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
B520C03JM
Asia
B520C04JM
South America
CAUTION
1.Do not install the ski rack,
antenna, etc. which are
attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet.They affect
the operation of the compass.
2.If the compass deviates from
the correct indication soon
after repeated adjustment, we
recommend that you have the
compass checked at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3.The compass may not indicate
the correct compass point in
tunnels or while driving up or
down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the
correct compass point when
the vehicle moves to an area
where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)
4.When cleaning the mirror, use
a paper towel or similar materi-
al dampened with glass clean-
er. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
Features of your vehicle
564
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing
in a narrow street.
WARNING - Rearview
mirrors
The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
Use your interior rearview
mirror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by force.
Use an approved spray de-icer
(not radiator antifreeze) to
release the frozen mechanism or
move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
457
Features of your vehicle
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror, move the lever
(1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to select
the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding
point on the mirror adjustment con-
trol to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into
neutral (center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
OANNCO2076
CAUTION
The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving.This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, seri-
ous injury or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
584
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
When you shift the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position, the outside
rearview mirror(s) will move down-
ward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the out-
side rearview mirror control switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
Left or Right : When the outside
rearview mirror con-
trol switch is in the L
(Left) or R (Right)
position, both outside
rearview mirrors will
move downward.
Neutral : When the outside rearview
mirror control switch is in
the neutral (center) posi-
tion, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate.
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will
automatically revert to their original
positions under the following condi-
tions:
When the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button is set to the ACC
or OFF position.
When the shift lever is moved to
any position except the R
(Reverse) position.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
ONCEMC3214
ODM042035
459
Features of your vehicle
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automat-
ically as follows:
Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the transmitter.
With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
ODM042053
Features of your vehicle
604
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
7. Turn signal indicator lights
ODMEMM2346/ODMEMM2054
Type A
- Gasoline engine
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
- Diesel engine
461
Features of your vehicle
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
7. Turn signal indicator lights
ODMEMM2347/ODMEMM2055
Type B
- Gasoline engine
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
- Diesel engine
Features of your vehicle
624
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination (if equipped)
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
moving the illumination control knob
right or left when the ignition switch
or Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or
the tale lights are turned on.
• The brightness has 20 levels : 1
(MIN) ~ 20 (MAX)
If you hold the illumination control
knob on the right end (+) or left end
(-), the brightness will be changed
continuously.
If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) : MOVE button for changing
items
(3) : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
ODMEDI2001/ODMEDI2029
Type A
Type B
ODM042056
ODM042224
463
Features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
ODM042057/ODMNMM2057/ODM042058/ODMNMM2058
Type A (km/h)
Type B (km/h)
Type A (MPH)
Type B (MPH)
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Features of your vehicle
644
Tachometer
ODMNMM2059/ODM042059/ODMNMM2221/ODM042221
Type A (Gasoline)
Type B (Gasoline)
Type A (Diesel)
Type B (Diesel)
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
465
Features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pres-
sure and could severe burns.
Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “130 or H” position, it
indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
ODMEMM2223/ODMNMM2223
Type A
ODMEMM2351/ODMNMM2351
Type B
ODMEMM2222/ODMNMM2222
Type A
ODMEMM2352/ODMNMM2352
Type B
Features of your vehicle
664
NOTICE
The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilo-
meters or miles.
WARNING - Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “0 or E
(Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
ODMEDI2903/ODMEDI2904
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2901/ODMEDI2902
467
Features of your vehicle
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.
For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times
and then illuminates, and also warn-
ing chime sounds 3 times.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 4°C (39.2°F)
- The ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is ON
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive
more attentively and safely refrain-
ing from over-speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden braking or sharp
turning, etc.
ODMEDI2905/OVF041089
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2906/OVF041090
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
684
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
•Drive :D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped, For Europe)
In the Sports Mode, this indicator
informs which gear is desired while
driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up :
2,
3,
4,
5,
6
• Shifting down :
1,
2,
3,
4,
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,
or 6th gear).
When the system is not working prop-
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
ODMEDI2907/OVF041049
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI3908/OVF041048
Type A
Type B
469
Features of your vehicle
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes
Symbol
Explanation
Type A Type B
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,
fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Service
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and
warning messages related to TPMS, washer fluid.
User Settings
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps,
and so on.
LDWS
(if equipped)
-
This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to “Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 5.
A/V
(if equipped)
- This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Tur n By Turn
(if equipped)
- This mode displays the state of the navigation.
or
or
For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
or
Features of your vehicle
704
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position. (The mileage and
time changes to "---")
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Activate the reset mode by pressing
the SELECT/RESET button for
more than 5 seconds, then press the
SELECT/RESET button again
for more than 1 second (Europe).
- Press the SELECT/RESET button
for more than 1 second (Except
Europe).
ODMEDI2067/ODMEDI2071
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2066/ODMEDI2070
Type A
Type B
471
Features of your vehicle
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service in OFF” message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
Speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
ODMEDI2068/ODMEDI2072
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2025/ODMEDI2054
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
724
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Star/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
Driver Door Unlock:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the driver's door is
unlocked.
Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Power Tailgate (if equipped)
Off (not checked) :
The power tailgate function will be
deactivated.
On (checked) :
The power tailgate function will be
activated.
For more details, refer to "Tailgate"
in this chapter.
Lamp
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome func-
tion will be activated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the puddle lamp will
be activated.
Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple
turn signal) (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
Travel Mode (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the traffic
change function will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Lighting" in
this chapter.
473
Features of your vehicle
Settings
Language (if equipped)
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD display.
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Welcome Sound
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Shift Indicator (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the shift indi-
cator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in this chapter.
Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refu-
eling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
744
Service Interval (Except Europe)
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(km or mi.) and period (months).
NOTICE
If it is not available to set service
interval on your vehicle, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
ODMEDI2909 ODMEDI2910
ODMEDI2065/ODMEDI2069
Type A
Type B
475
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with-
out the shift lever in P (Park) posi-
tion.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
ODMEDI2003/ODMEDI2031
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2002/ODMEDI2030
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2004/ODMEDI2032
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
764
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
ODMEDI2006/ODMEDI2034
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2005/ODMEDI2033
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2007/ODMEDI2035
Type A
Type B
477
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
It means that you always have the
smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, we recommend
that you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ODMEDI2009/ODMEDI2037
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2010/ODMEDI2038
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2011/ODMEDI2039
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
784
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
ODMEDI2012/ODMEDI2040
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2013/ODMEDI2041
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2014/ODMEDI2042
Type A
Type B
479
Features of your vehicle
Door Open
It means that any door is open.
Tailgate Open
It means that the tailgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
It means that the sunroof is open.
ODMEDI2017/ODMEDI2045
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2018/ODMEDI2046
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2019/ODMEDI2047
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
804
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)
This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch under the steer-
ing wheel is OFF.
It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
ODMEDI2020/ODMEDI2049
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2021/ODMEDI2050
Type A
Type B
ODMEDI2022/ODMEDI2051
Type A
Type B
481
Features of your vehicle
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Features of your vehicle
824
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km
or mi.
To reset the tripmeter, press the
SELECT/RESET button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is dis-
played.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the SELECT/RESET button
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
Type A
- Trip A (km, km/h)
- Trip A (mi., MPH)
- Trip B (km, km/h)
- Trip B (mi., MPH)
- Trip A (km, km/h)
- Trip A (mi., MPH)
- Trip B (km, km/h)
- Trip B (mi., MPH)
Type B
ODMEDI2027/ODMEDI2028
ODMEDI2062/ODMEDI2063
ONCEDI3057/ONCEDI3059
ONCEDI3058/ONCEDI3060
483
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance is
less than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or
the driving time is less than 10 sec-
onds since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)
The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
To reset the elapsed time, press
the SELECT/RESET button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 50 ~ 9999 km or
30 ~ 9999 mi.
If the estimated distance is below 50
km (30 mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
The trip computer may not regis-
ter additional fuel if less than 6
liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
added to the vehicle.
The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Type A
- km, L/100km
- mi., MPG
- km, L/100km
- mi., MPG
Type B
ODMEDI2026/ONCEDI3055
ODMEDI2061/ONCEDI3056
Features of your vehicle
844
Average Fuel Economy (2)
The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/ 100km or MPG
The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the SELECT/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the aver-
age fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 30
L/100km or 0 ~ 50 MPG
485
Features of your vehicle
Warning lights
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light illuminates or blinks:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates or blinks for approx-
imately 6 seconds.
- It remains on if the seat belt is not
fastened.
When the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Features of your vehicle
864
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required (For
more details, refer to “Brake Fluid”
in chapter 7). Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks. If any
leak on brake system is still found,
the warning light remains on, or
the brakes do not operate proper-
ly, do not drive the vehicle.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle towed to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
487
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
Features of your vehicle
884
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, we recommend you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE - Electric Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning Light
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminates
when the Electronic Stability control
(ESC) Indicator Light comes on to
indicates that the ESC is not work-
ing properly (This does not indicate
malfunction of the EPB).
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
EPB
489
Features of your vehicle
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Diesel Engine
with DPF (if equipped)
When the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) blinks, it may stop
blinking after driving the vehicle:
- at more than 60km/h (37 mph), or
- at more than 2nd gear with 1500
~ 2000 engine rpm for a certain
time (for about 25 minutes).
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) continues to blink in
spite of the procedure, we rec-
ommend that you have the DPF
system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) blinking for a long time,
the DPF system can be dam-
aged and fuel consumption can
worsen.
Features of your vehicle
904
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either the
alternator or electrical charging system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
CAUTION - Diesel Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) blinks, some error
related to the injection quantity
adjustment occurs which could
result in loss of engine power,
combustion noise and poor
emission.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the engine control
system inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Engine
Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
491
Features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
When the engine oil pressure is
low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available,
we recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Engine Oil Level
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil level should
be checked.
If the engine oil level is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light
If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
924
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and dam-
age the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
WARNING - Safe Stopping
The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
493
Features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not close securely.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not close
securely.
Fuel Filter Warning Light
(Diesel Engine)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter.
In this case, remove the water from
the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel
Filter” in chapter 7.
CAUTION - Fuel Filter
Warning Light
When the Fuel Filter Warning
Light illuminates, engine
power (vehicle speed & idle
speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the
warning light on, engine parts
(injector, common rail, high
pressure fuel pump) may be
damaged. If this occurs, we
recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
944
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
Warning Light (if
equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with
the 4WD system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sound for approximately 5
seconds.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light
remains on, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
AFLS
120
km/h
495
Features of your vehicle
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When you activate the active ECO
system by pressing the ACTIVE ECO
button.
For more details, refer to “Active
ECO System” in chapter 5.
ECO
Features of your vehicle
964
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart
Key) (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
497
Features of your vehicle
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may a malfunction with the turn sig-
nal system. In this case, we recom-
mend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the headlights are on.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the front fog lights are on.
Rear Fog Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the rear fog lights are on.
Features of your vehicle
984
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
[White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
[Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
[Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to “Auto Hold”
in chapter 5.
Glow Indicator Light
(Diesel Engine)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the engine is being preheat-
ed with the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button in the ON
position.
- The engine can be started after
the glow indicator light goes off.
- The illumination time varies with
the engine coolant temperature,
air temperature, and battery con-
dition.
If the indicator light remains on or
blinks after the engine has warmed
up or while driving, there may a mal-
function with the engine preheating
system.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE - Engine Preheating
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is com-
pleted, set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the
LOCK or OFF position for 10 sec-
onds and then to the ON position in
order to preheat the engine again.
AUTO
HOLD
499
Features of your vehicle
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
When you select 4WD Lock mode
by pressing the 4WD LOCK button.
- The 4WD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
Cruise
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
Downhill Brake Control
(DBC) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC sys-
tem by pressing the DBC button.
This warning light blinks:
When the DBC is operating.
This warning light illuminates yellow:
When there is a malfunction with
the DBC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to “Downhill
Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
CRUISE
SET
CAUTION - 4WD Lock
Mode
Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of 4WD related parts.
Features of your vehicle
1004
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 120 cm (47 in.) behind the
vehicle. This system is a supplemen-
tal system and it is not intended to
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the back sen-
sors are limited. Whenever backing-
up, pay as much attention to what is
behind you as you would in a vehicle
without a rear parking assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated.
If you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) (if equipped)
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ONCNCO2040
WARNING
The rear parking assist system
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
s
s
ODMEDR2148
4101
Features of your vehicle
This system will activate when back-
ing up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 10 km/h (6 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation
is approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(23 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
When an object is within 30 cm (11
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
Features of your vehicle
1024
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1
m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
The rear parking assist system
may not sound sequentially
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (11 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow, dirt, or water,
the sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a soft
cloth.
Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors; It can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors. Always visually
check behind the vehicle when back-
ing up. Be sure to inform any driv-
ers of the vehicle that may be unfa-
miliar with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limitations.
4103
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the gear to
the R (Reverse) position, this may
indicate a malfunction in the rear
parking assist system. If this occurs,
we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor. Always per-
form a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants due to a rear
parking assist system malfunc-
tion. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
1044
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 100 cm
(39.4 in.) in front and 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever moving pay as much
attention to what is in front and
behind of you as you would in a vehi-
cle without a parking assist system.
ONCNCO2041
ONCNCO2040
Front
Rear
WARNING
The parking assist system
should only be considered as a
supplementary function. The
driver must check the front and
rear view. The operational func-
tion of the parking assist system
can be affected by many factors
and conditions of the surround-
ings, so the responsibility rests
always with the driver.
Sensors
Sensors
4105
Features of your vehicle
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
This system activates when the
parking assist system button is
pressed with the ignition switch ON.
The indicator of the parking assist
system button turns on automati-
cally and activates the parking
assist system when you shift the
gear to the R (Reverse) position or
press the SPAS button. It will turn
off automatically when you drive
above 40 km/h (24.8 mph). (If
equipped with SPAS)
If the vehicle speed is above
10km/h (6.2 mph), the parking
assist system will not operate.
The sensing distance while back-
ing up is approximately 120 cm (47
in.) when you are driving less than
10 km/h (6.2 mph).
The side sensors are activated
when you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position.
The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 100 cm
(39.4 in.) when you are driving less
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approx-
imately 25 cm when the system is ON.
ODM042236
Features of your vehicle
1064
CAUTION
This system can only sense
objects within the range and
location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are
not installed. Also, small or
slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sen-
sors may not be detected by
the sensors.
Always visually check behind
the vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers
of the vehicle that may be
unfamiliar with the system
regarding the systems capa-
bilities and limitations.
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
NOTICE
The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration
according to objects or sensor status.
Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Type of warning indicator and sound
4107
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to nor-
mal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Features of your vehicle
1084
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm from the sensor,
or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected. Always visual-
ly check in front and behind the
vehicle when driving. Be sure to
inform any drivers in the vehicle
that may be unfamiliar with the sys-
tem regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more
of the below occurs you may have a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system.
You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on
the road, particularly pedestrians,
and especially children. Be aware
that some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the objects distance, size or mate-
rial, all of which can limit the effec-
tiveness of the sensor. Always
perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a park-
ing assist system. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
(blinks)
is displayed. (if equipped)
4109
Features of your vehicle
The Smart Parking Assist System
helps drivers park their vehicle by
using sensors to measure parallel
parking spaces, control the steering
wheel to semi-automatically park the
car and provide instruction on the
LCD display to help through parking.
NOTICE
The vehicle will not stop for pedes-
trians or objects that may be in its
path, so the driver must monitor
the maneuver.
Use the system only in parking lots
and places used for parking.
The system does not work if there is
no car parked in front of the park-
ing space you are planning to park
or if it is a diagonal parking space.
After parking your vehicle using the
system, the vehicle may not be
parked at the exact spot you have
wished. For example, the space
between your vehicle and wall may
not be the distance you have desired.
Deactivate the system and park
your vehicle manually, when the sit-
uation requires parking manually.
The Parking Assist System's front
and rear warning sound activates
when the Smart Parking Assist
System is activated.
After searching for a parking
space is completed, the Smart
Parking Assist System will be can-
celed if the Parking Assist System
is cancelled by pressing the button
to the OFF position.
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM041270
WARNING
The Smart Parking Assist
System should only be con-
sidered as a supplementary
function. The driver must
check the front and rear view
for objects. The operational
function of the Smart Parking
Assist System can be affected
by many factors and condi-
tions of the surroundings, so
the responsibility rests always
with the driver.
• The system may not operate
normally if the vehicle needs
wheel alignment adjustment.
We recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you use a different tire or
wheel size rather than the size
recommended by the HYUNDAI
dealer, the system may not
work properly. Always use the
same size tire and wheel.
Features of your vehicle
1104
Operating condition
The system will help park the vehicle
in the middle or back of a parked
vehicle. Use the system when all the
below conditions are met.
When the parking space is a
straight line
When parallel parking is required
When there is a parked vehicle
When there is enough space to
move the vehicle
Non-operating condition
Never use the Smart Parking Assist
System in the below conditions.
Curved parking space
Inclined roads
A vehicle loaded with longer or
wider cargo compared to the vehicle
Diagonal parking space
Parking space with trash, grass or
barriers
Heavy snow or rain
A pole close to the parking line
Bumpy roads
A vehicle equipped with a snow
chain or spare tire
Tire pressure lower or higher than
the standard tire pressure
A trailer connected to the vehicle
Slippery or uneven road
Big vehicles such as buses or
trucks parked
• Sensor covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water
Moisture frozen on the sensor.
A motorcycle or bicycle parked
A trash can or obstacle near
Heavy wind
Wheel changed to an unauthorized
size
A problem with the wheel alignment
Next to a garden or bush
OLM041271
Right side
- parallel mode
Left side
-parallel mode
4111
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Do not use the Smart Parking
Assist System in the following
conditions for unexpected
results may occur and cause a
serious accident.
1. Parking on inclines
The driver must apply the accel-
erator and brake pedal when
parking on inclines. If the driver
is unfamiliar with applying the
accelerator and brake pedal, a
car accident may occur.
(Continued)
OLM041290
(Continued)
2. Parking in snow
Snow may interfere with sensor
operation or the system may
cancel if the road is slippery
while parking. Also, if the driver
is unfamiliar with applying the
accelerator and brake pedal, a
car accident may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Parking in narrow space
The system may not search for
parking spaces if the space is
too narrow. Even if it operates
always be careful.
(Continued)
OLM041292
OSL040144
Features of your vehicle
1124
(Continued)
4. Parking diagonal
The system is a supplemental
for parallel parking. Diagonal
line parking is not available.
Even if the vehicle is able to
enter the space, do not operate
the Smart Parking Assist
System.The system will attempt
parallel parking.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Parking in uneven road
Parking in uneven roads, the
driver needs to properly apply
the pedal (accelerator or brake).
If not, the system may cancel
when the vehicle slips or an
accident may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6. Parking behind a truck
An accident may occur when
parking behind a vehicle higher
than yours. For example, bus,
truck, etc.
(Continued)
OSL040145
OLM041274
OLM041291
4113
Features of your vehicle
How the system works
1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist
System
2. Select parking assist mode
3. Search for parking space (slowly
move forward.)
4. Search complete (automatic
search by sensor.)
5. Steering wheel control
(1) Shift according to the instruc-
tion on the LCD display.
(2) Drive slowly with the brake
pedal applied.
6. Smart Parking Assist System
complete
7. If necessary, manually adjust posi-
tion of vehicle.
NOTICE
Before activating the system check
if the conditions are possible to use
the system.
• For your safety, always apply the
brake pedal except for when driving.
1. Activate Smart Parking Assist
System
Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button (the button indicator
will illuminate).
The Parking Assist System will be
activated (the button indicator will
illuminate).
A warning sound will be heard if an
obstacle is detected.
(Continued)
7. Obstacle in parking space
The system may search for a
parking space even though an
obstacle is in the parking
space. An accident may occur if
you continue to park the vehicle
with the system.
Do not solely rely on the Smart
Parking Assist System.
OLM041272
ODM042240
Features of your vehicle
1144
Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button again for more than
2 seconds to turn off the system.
The Smart Parking Assist System
defaults to the OFF position when-
ever the ignition switch is turned on.
2. Select parking assist mode
Select the parking assist mode by
pressing the Smart Parking Assist
System button with the shift lever in
N (Neutral) or D(Drive) and the
brake pedal depressed.
The right side parallel mode is
selected automatically when the
Smart Parking Assist System is
activated.
To select the left side parallel mode
press the Smart Parking Assist
System button once more.
If the button is pressed again, the
system will turn off.
ODMEDR2114
Right side
- parallel mode
ODMEDR2101
Left side
- parallel mode
4115
Features of your vehicle
3. Search for parking space
Slowly drive forward maintaining
the distance of approximately 50cm
~ 150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the
parked vehicles. The side sensors
will search for a parking space.
If the vehicle speed is over 30km/h
(18.6mph), a message will appear
to notify to reduce speed.
If the vehicle speed is over 40km/h
(24.8mph), the system will cancel.
NOTICE
Turn on the hazard warning flasher
if it is crowded with other vehicles.
If the parking lot is small, slowly
drive more nearer to the parking
space.
The search for a parking space
will be completed only when there
is enough space for the vehicle to
move to park.
NOTICE
When searching for a parking
space, the system may not be able
to find a parking space if there is
no vehicle parked, a parking space
is available after driving by or a
parking space is available before
driving by.
The system may not operate nor-
mally in the following conditions:
(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
ODMEDR2144
Right side
- parallel mode
ODMEDR2143
Left side
- parallel mode
Features of your vehicle
1164
NOTICE
Slowly drive forward maintaining
the distance of approximately 50cm
~ 150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the
parked vehicles. If not within the
distance, the system may not be able
to search for a parking space.
4. Search complete
While driving forward to search for a
parking space, the above message
will appear with a beep sound if the
search is complete. Stop the vehicle
and shift to the R (Reverse) position.
CAUTION
After searching for a parking
space is completed, continue
using the system after checking
the surrounding area.
OLM041273
50~150 cm
CAUTION
While using the Smart Parking
Assist System if the Auto Hold
activates the above message
will appear. Turn the Auto Hold
operation off. When you cancel
the Auto Hold operation by
depressing the accelerator
pedal, always check the sur-
rounding area near your vehicle.
ODMEDR2103/ODMEDR2116
ODMEDR2145
Right side
- parallel mode
ODMEDR2104
Left side
-parallel mode
4117
Features of your vehicle
5. Steering wheel control
The above message will appear if
the shift lever is in R (Reverse).
The steering wheel will be con-
trolled automatically.
The system will be cancelled if you
firmly hold the steering wheel while
it is controlled automatically.
The system will be cancelled if vehi-
cle speed is over 7km/h(4.3mph).
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
If the parking space is to small
the system may be cancelled
at the Steering wheel control
stage. Do not park your vehi-
cle if the space is too small.
ODMEDR2105/ODMEDR2118
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
Always check for objects
around your vehicle before
driving.
• If the vehicle does not move
even though the brake pedal
is not depressed, check the
surrounding before depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. Be
sure not to speed over 7km/h
(4.3mph).
WARNING
Do not put your hands between
the steering wheel while it is
being automatically controlled.
Features of your vehicle
1184
NOTICE
• If you do not follow the instruc-
tions provided, you may fail to
park your vehicle.
However, if the Parking Assist
System warning sound (distance
from object is within 30cm: con-
tinuous beep) occurs, slowly drive
the vehicle to the reverse direction
of the detected object after check-
ing the surrounding.
Always check the surrounding
before driving your vehicle if the
Parking Assist System warning
sound (distance from object is
within 30cm: continuous beep) is
heard for the object is close to
your vehicle.
To cancel the system while parking
Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button or turn the steering
wheel to the left or right.
Gear shift while steering wheel control
When the above message appears
with a beep sound, shift the gear and
drive the vehicle with the brake pedal
depressed.
ODMEDR2121/ODMEDR2122
ODMEDR2107/ODMEDR2108
WARNING
Always be careful while parking
for other vehicles or pedestrians.
CAUTION
Always check the surrounding
before releasing the brake pedal.
4119
Features of your vehicle
6. Smart Parking Assist System
completed
Complete parking your vehicle
according to the instructions on the
LCD display. If required, manually
control the steering wheel and com-
plete parking your vehicle.
NOTICE
The brake pedal must be depressed
by the driver while parking your
vehicle.
The system may be cancelled in the
below conditions:
Ignoring the gear shift message
and drive the vehicle approximate-
ly 150cm (59in).
The front and rear Parking Assist
System warning sound (distance
from object is within 30cm: contin-
uous beep) is heard at the same
time.
6 minutes have passed since the
vehicle has been controlled by the
Smart Parking Assist System.
The shift lever is changed to the P
(Park) or R (Reverse) position
while searching for parking space.
Additional instructions
(messages)
When the Smart Parking Assist
System is operating, a message may
appear regardless of the parking order.
ODMEDR2110/ODMEDR2123
Type A
Type B
ODMEDR2111/ODMEDR2124
ODMEDR2109/ODMEDR2119
Type A
Type A
Type B
Type B
Features of your vehicle
1204
The messages will appear according
to the circumstances. Follow the
instructions provided while parking
your vehicle with the Smart Parking
Assist System.
NOTICE
In the below conditions the system
will be cancelled. Park your vehicle
manually.
1. Search for parking space
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
40km/h (24.8mph)
- When you press the Smart
Parking Assist System button
(the front and rear Parking
Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to
R (Reverse)
2. Steering wheel control
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
7km/h (4.3 mph)
- When you press the Smart
Parking Assist System button
(the front and rear Parking
Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to
D (Drive) before entering the
parking space
- When you hold the steering
wheel firmly
System malfunction
If there is a problem with the sys-
tem, when the system is turned on,
the above message will appear.
Also, the indicator on the button
will not light up and a beep sound
will be heard 3 times.
If there is a problem with only the
Smart Parking Assist System, the
Parking Assist System will operate
after 2 seconds.
If you notice any problem, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
ODMEDR2112/ODMEDR2125
Type A
Type B
4121
Features of your vehicle
The rearview camera will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever
in the R (Reverse) position.
NOTICE
The warning "Warning ! Check sur-
roundings for safety" will appear on
the rearview display when the
rearview camera is activated.
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This system is a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/out-
side rearview mirror and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that cannot
be seen through the camera.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the cam-
era may not operate normally.
ODM042238
ODM042239
Features of your vehicle
1224
The hazard warning flasher should
be used whenever you find it neces-
sary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
This causes all turn signal lights to
blink. The hazard warning lights will
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
ODM042242
ODM042243
Type A
Type B
4123
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver- side door.
With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if
the driver parks on the side of road
at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlight (Headlamp) escort
function (if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights)
remain on for approximately 5 min-
utes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-
tion. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter or smart key twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehi-
cle through other doors (except
driver’s door), the battery saver
function does not operate.
Therefore, it causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
ODMECO2004
ODMECO2005
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
1244
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail, position,
license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position the head, tail, position,
license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the
ON position to turn on the head-
lights.
ODMECO2006
ODMECO2007
Type C
Type D
ODMECO2008
ODMECO2009
Type A
Type B
ODMECO2010
ODMECO2011
Type A
Type B
4125
Features of your vehicle
Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
adaptive front lighting system
(AFLS), it will also operate when the
headlamp is ON.
Traffic change (for Europe)
Use this function when you visit a
country with opposite traffic direction.
If the traffic change is activated when
you visit a country with opposite traf-
fic direction, it will decrease the daz-
zle on oncoming vehicle drivers.
Follow the below procedure.
ODMECO2012
CAUTION
Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel, this will
ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work
properly.
Features of your vehicle
1264
1. Select “User Settings” by pressing
the mode button ( ) on the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Select “Lamp” by pressing the
move button ( ) and select but-
ton ( ) on the steering wheel.
3. Check “Travel Mode” by pressing
the move button ( ) and select
button ( ) on the steering wheel.
NOTICE
If the engine is turned off with the
traffic change function activated,
and the engine turned on again, the
above message will appear. It is to
notify the driver the function is acti-
vated.
4. To cancel the change, follow the
steps 1 to 3 from the previous page.
ODMECO2072/ODMECO2073
Type A
Type B
ODMECO2074/ODMECO2075
Type A
Type B
OMDECO2040/ODMECO2041
Type A
Type B
4127
Features of your vehicle
High - beam operation
1. Turn the light switch to the head-
light position.
2. Push the lever away from you.
NOTICE
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
Flashing headlights
Pull the lever towards you. It will
return to the normal position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
ODMECO2013 ODMECO2014
WARNING
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
Features of your vehicle
1284
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3
times.
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
1. Turn on the park light.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the park
light.
ODMECO2026
ODMECO2015
4129
Features of your vehicle
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn on the rear fog lights, do one
of the following:
Position the light switch in the
headlight position and then turn
the light switch (1) to the rear fog
light position.
Position the light switch in the park
light, turn the light switch to the
front fog light (if equipped) position,
and then turn the light switch (1) to
the rear fog light position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, do one
of the following:
Turn off the headlight switch.
Turn the light switch to the rear fog
light position again.
When the light switch in the park
light, if you turn off the front fog
light, the rear fog light will also turn
off.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog
lights consume large amounts
of vehicle electrical power. Only
use the fog lights when visibility
is poor.
ODMECO2016
Features of your vehicle
1304
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especial-
ly helpful after dawn and before sun-
set.
The DRL system will turn off the ded-
icated lamp when:
1. The front fog light or headlight (low
beam) switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the pas-
sengers and the loading weight in
the luggage area, turn the beam lev-
eling switch.
The higher the number of the switch
is positioned, the lower the headlight
beam level. Always keep the head-
light beam at the proper leveling
position, or headlights may dazzle
other road users.
Listed below are the examples of
proper switch settings. For loading
conditions other than those listed
below, adjust the switch position so
that the beam level may be the near-
est as the condition obtained accord-
ing to the list.
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permis-
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
ODMECO2017
4131
Features of your vehicle
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number
of passengers and loading weight in
the luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
Adaptive front lighting system
(AFLS) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
we recommend that you take your
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
ODM042247
ODMECO2018
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined
backward according to passen-
ger's posture, or the headlight
beam is irradiated to the high or
low position, we recommend
that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
Features of your vehicle
1324
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· / MIST – Single wipe
· O / OFF – Off
· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· 1 / LO– Low wiper speed
· 2 / HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· HI / 2 – High wiper speed
· LO / 1 – Low wiper speed
· OFF / O – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
ODMECO2019/ODM042252/ODMECO2020/ODM042253
Type A
Type A
Type B
Type B
4133
Features of your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
/ MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this
( / MIST) position and
release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if
the lever is held in this
position.
O / OFF : Wiper is not in operation
--- / INT : Wiper operates intermittently
at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in light rain or
mist. To vary the speed setting,
turn the speed control knob.
1 / LO : Normal wiper speed
2 / HI : Fast wiper speed
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to per-
form a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
ODMECO2022
Rain sensor
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situa-
tions to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the body:
Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
Features of your vehicle
1344
Windshield washers
(if equipped)
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice may
damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow
and ice and defrost the wind-
shield properly prior to operat-
ing the windshield wipers.
ODMECO2021
ODM042257
Type A
Type B
4135
Features of your vehicle
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
headlight washer it will operate at the
same time when you operate the
windshield washer. It will operate
when the headlight low beam is
turned on and the ignition switch or
engine start/stop button is in the ON
position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on
to the headlights.
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers peri-
odically to confirm that the wash-
er fluid is being sprayed properly
onto the headlight lenses.
The headlight washer can be oper-
ated 15 minutes after being oper-
ated last time.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
Features of your vehicle
1364
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI / 2 – High wiper speed
LO / 1– Low wiper speed
OFF / O – Off
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever. (if equipped)
ODMECO2024
ODM042338
Type A
Type B
ODMECO2023
ODM042256
Type A
Type B
4137
Features of your vehicle
Interior lamp AUTO cut
When all entrances are closed, if
you lock the vehicle by using the
transmitter or the smart key, all
interior lamp will be off within 5
seconds.
If you do not operate anything in
the vehicle after turning off the
engine, the lights will turn off after
20 minutes.
Map lamp
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
ODM042258
ODM042259
Type A
Type B
ONCDCO3048
Type C
Features of your vehicle
1384
Press the lens (1) to turn the map
lamp on or off
ON (2): The map lamp and room
lamp stays on at all times.
OFF (3): The lamps are off even if a
door is opened.
• ROOM (4): The map lamp and
room lamp stays on at
all times.
DOOR (5):
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when doors are
unlocked with a transmitter or
smart key as long as the doors
are not opened. The lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
NOTICE
When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the switch is in
the OFF position (3).
4139
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the cover of the vanity mir-
ror will automatically turn on the mir-
ror lamp.
Luggage room lamp
• ON : The luggage room lamp stays
on at all times.
DOOR : The luggage room lamp
comes on when the tail-
gate is opened.
• OFF :The luggage room lamp is off.
OEN046081
ODM042341
Type B
ODM042260
Type A
OXM049136
Features of your vehicle
1404
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the light switch is in the parking light
position or headlight position and the
glove box is opened.
Door courtesy lamp
(if equipped)
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
ODM042262
ODM042261
4141
Features of your vehicle
Headlamp welcome
When the headlight(light switch in
the headlight or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and tailgate) are
locked and closed, the headlight,
position light and tail light will come
on for 15 seconds if any of the below
is performed.
Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button (on the transmitter or smart
key), the lights will turn off immedi-
ately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
tailgate) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp
(if equipped)
When all doors are locked and
closed, the puddle lamp and pocket
lamp will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
NOTICE
The puddle lamp and pocket lamp
do not operate when the outside
rearview mirror folding switch is in
the fold position.
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Features of your vehicle
1424
DEFROSTER
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel.The indicator
on the rear window defroster but-
ton illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it
off before operating the rear
defroster.
• The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns off after approxi-
mately 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
ODM042271
Manual climate control
ODM042272/Q
Automatic climate control
4143
Features of your vehicle
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
The outside mirror defroster will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at
the same time you turn on the front
windshield defroster.
Features of your vehicle
1444
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ONCNCL2001/ODM042273/ONCNCL2002
1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Temperature control button
3. Air conditioning button
4. MAX A/C (Max airconditioning) button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Fan speed control knob
9. 3rd row climate control ON/OFF
button
10. 3rd row fan speed control knob
11. 3rd row blower ON/OFF button
12. 3rd row mode selection button
13. 3rd row temperature control knob*
* if equipped
Front climate control (Type A)
Front climate control (Type B)
3
rd
row air climate control (for Type A)
4145
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
ONCNCL2003
2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, G, H) (Vent G, H : if equipped)
The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents is controlled by the front cli-
mate control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor
(E, F).
The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F) may be weaker than
the instrument panel vents for the long air duct.
Close the air vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row
outlet vents may cool a little during heating operation. (Use the 2nd and 3rd
row outlet vents (F, G) during cooling operation.)
Features of your vehicle
1464
Mode selection
The mode buttons control the direc-
tion of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
ODMECL2002
4147
Features of your vehicle
MAX A/C-Level (if equipped)
To select the MAX A/C, turn the fan
speed control knob to the right then
press the MAX A/C button.
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control switch
allows you to control the temperature
of the airflow in the vehicle.
To change the temperature:
Press the (red) switch to
increase temperature.
Press the (blue) switch to
decrease temperature.
The temperature status will be dis-
played at the above switch panel as
a indicator.
ODM042277
ODM042279
ODM042280
Features of your vehicle
1484
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
Type A
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Type B
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
ONCNCL2004
ODM042281
Type A
Type B
4149
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
WARNING
Continue using the climate
control system in the recircu-
lated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
Continue using the climate
control system in the recircu-
lated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
ODM042282
Features of your vehicle
1504
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" posi-
tion.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
3
rd
row climate control
(if equipped)
1. To turn the 3
rd
row climate control
on or off, press the 3
rd
row climate
control ON/OFF button (1) or (5).
ODM042284
ODM042283
ONCNCL2002
Front
3
rd
row
ONCNCL2005
4151
Features of your vehicle
2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)
to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control knob
(3) to the desired position.
4. Select the desired direction of the
air flow by pressing the mode
selecting button (4).
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Features of your vehicle
1524
Air conditioning (if equipped)
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friend-
ly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula-
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which
air conditioning refrigerant is
applied your vehicle at the label
inside of the engine room. Refer to
section 8 for more detail location of
air conditioning refrigerant label.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi-
tioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
CAUTION
The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilat-
ed place.
The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
4153
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1544
NOTICE
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air condi-
tioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula-
tion in your country at the time of
producing.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflam-
mable and at very
high pressure, the air
conditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and
certified technicians.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
4155
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ONCNCL2006/ONCNCL2009/ONCNCL2002
1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Rear window defrost button
3. Display
4. Air conditioning button*
5. Mode selection button
6. Dual temperature control selection button
7. Driver's temperature control button
8. Front fan speed control knob
9. AUTO (automatic control) button
10. Front blower OFF button
11. Air intake control button* or recirculated
air position button*
12. 3
rd
row climate control ON/OFF button
(controlled from the front)
13. Passenger's temperature control button
14. 3
rd
row fan speed control knob
15. 3
rd
row blower ON/OFF button
16. 3
rd
row mode selection button
17. 3
rd
row temperature control knob
18. Climate control information screen
selection button*
* if equipped
Front climate control (Type A)
Front climate control (Type B)
3
rd
row climate control (for Type A and B)
Features of your vehicle
1564
ODMECL2010/OANNMM2002
1. Front windshield defroster button
2. Rear window defrost button
3. Display
4. Air conditioning button*
5. Mode selection button
6. Dual temperature control selection button
7. Driver's temperature control button
8. Front fan speed control knob
9. AUTO (automatic control) button
10. Blower OFF button
11. Air intake control button* or recirculated
air position button*
12. Passenger's temperature control button
13. Climate control information screen
selection button
* if equipped
Front climate control (Type C)
Front climate control (Type D)
4157
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1 Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the tempera-
ture.
2. Set the Driver’s temperature con-
trol switch to the desired tempera-
ture.
NOTICE
To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F - Except
Europe).
ODM042287
ODM042290
Features of your vehicle
1584
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
ODM042336
ODM042288
4159
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
ODM042289
Type A Type B
Features of your vehicle
1604
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HIGH) by holding the
button.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (LOW) by holding the
button.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When set to
the lowest temperature, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Also, if
the passenger side temperature
control button is operated, it will
automatically change to the DUAL
mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control to adjust the driver
side temperature. Operate the
passenger side temperature con-
trol to adjust the passenger side
temperature.
ODM042279
ODMECL2003
The driver’s side
The passenger’s side
ODM042291
Type A
Type B
4161
Features of your vehicle
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest (HIGH) or lowest
(LOW) temperature, the DUAL mode
deactivates for maximum heating or
cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-
senger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control button. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode between Centigrade to
Fahrenheit as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
ODMECL2004
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
1624
Type A
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Type B
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
4163
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the
airflow in the vehicle.
To change the fan speed:
• Turn the knob to the right (+) to
increase fan speed.
Turn the knob to the left (-) to
decrease fan speed.
To turn off the fan speed, press the
OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
WARNING
Continue using the climate
control system in the recircu-
lated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
Continue using the climate
control system in the recircu-
lated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness,
and loss of vehicle control.
Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while
driving.
ODM042293 ODMECL2016
Features of your vehicle
1644
OFF mode
Press the blower OFF button to turn
off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
3
rd
row climate control
(if equipped)
1. To turn the 3
rd
row climate control
on or off, press the 3
rd
row climate
control ON/OFF button (1) or (5).
ODM042295
ODM042297
ONCNCL2007
ONCNCL2002
Front
3
rd
row
4165
Features of your vehicle
2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)
to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control knob
(3) to the desired position.
4. Select the desired direction of the
air flow by pressing the mode
selecting button (4).
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Features of your vehicle
1664
Air conditioning (if equipped)
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friend-
ly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula-
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which
air conditioning refrigerant is
applied your vehicle at the label
inside of hood. Refer to section 8
for more detail location of air con-
ditioning refrigerant label.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi-
tioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
CAUTION
The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained
and certified technicians to
insure proper and safe opera-
tion.
The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilat-
ed place.
The air conditioning evapora-
tor (cooling coil) shall never
be repaired or replaced with
one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle and new
replacement MAC evaporators
shall be certified (and labeled)
as meeting SAE Standard
J2842.
4167
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1684
NOTICE
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air condi-
tioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula-
tion in your country at the time of
producing.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflam-
mable and at very
high pressure, the air
conditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and
certified technicians.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
4169
Features of your vehicle
For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired temperature.
2. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically. If the
position is selected, air condition-
ing will also be selected automati-
cally.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visi-
bility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
ODM042298
Features of your vehicle
1704
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired temperature.
2. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
ODM042299
ODM042300
4171
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the climate control system is on.
NOTICE
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below -10 °C.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture of inside the wind-
shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air condition-
ing
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
ODM042301
ODM042303
Features of your vehicle
1724
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automat-
ically activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button 4
times within 2 seconds while press-
ing the AUTO button. The indicator of
front defroster button will blink 3
times to notify you that the system is
cancelled. To use the auto defogging
system again, follow the procedures
mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected
while the auto defogging system is
on, the auto defogging indicator will
blink 3 times to give notice that the
A/C off can not be selected.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
4173
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
push the lever and then lift up the
cover.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a key. (1)
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open (3). Close the glove
box after use.
ODMECO2033
ODMECO2032
Type A
Type B
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
CAUTION
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
can not close securely.
ODM042304
Features of your vehicle
1744
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever (1) of
the vent installed in the glove box
to the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used,
slide the lever (1) to the closed
position.
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block
the vent, the cooling effectiveness of
the cool box is reduced.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
ODM042306
WARNING
Do not put perishable food in
the cool box because it may not
maintain the necessary consis-
tent temperature to keep the
food fresh.
4175
Features of your vehicle
Multi box (if equipped)
To open the cover, push the lever (1)
and the multi box will open automati-
cally.
It can be used for storing small items.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses in the
compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
ODM042307 ODM042308
CAUTION
Do not drive with the multi box
open.
WARNING
Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
Features of your vehicle
1764
Luggage tray
You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
ONCNCO2024
4177
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC
position or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
1. Open the cover by pressing the
switch.
2. Push the lighter all the way into the
socket.
When the element has heated, the
lighter will pop out to the "ready"
position.
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
out.
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums,
and coffee pots, for example)
may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
WARNING - Ashtray use
Do not use the vehicle’s ash-
tray as a waste receptacle.
Putting lit cigarettes or match-
es in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
WARNING
Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to over-
heat.
If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it
to prevent overheating.
ONCDCO3055 ODM042312
Features of your vehicle
1784
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
To use the center cup holder, pull
down the armrest and press the
open button.
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bot-
tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans and bottles out of
direct sunlight. Placing them in
a hot vehicle can cause them to
explode.
ODM042313
ONCNCO2026
Front
Rear
ODM042316
Center
4179
Features of your vehicle
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
NOTICE
Only bottles should be place in the
holder as it is written in the vehicle
“BOTTLE ONLY”.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The vanity mirror light comes on.
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket.
Adjust the sunvisor extension (3, if
equipped) forward and backward.
ODMECO2036
OHG040168
WARNING
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
Features of your vehicle
1804
Power outlet
CAUTION
Use power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug
after use. Using the accessory
plug for prolonged periods of
time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
ODM042318
ONCDCO3039
Center
Rear (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices
should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.
ONCDCO3054
ODMECO2037
Front
· Type A
· Type B
4181
Features of your vehicle
AC inverter (if equipped)
The AC inverter supplies 220V/200W
electric power to operate electric
accessories or equipments.
If you wish to use the AC inverter,
press the AC inverter button while
the engine is running. The light on
the AC inverter button will illuminate.
If you press the AC inverter button
again, the AC inverter will be deacti-
vated and the light on the AC invert-
er button will turn off.
NOTICE
When turning on the AC inverter,
the indicator on the AC inverter but-
ton illuminates late while the system
conducts a self-check.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get electro-
cuted or fire may occur.
ODM042320
ONCDCO3028
Features of your vehicle
1824
NOTICE
Rated voltage : AC 220V
Maximum electric power : 200W
In order to avoid an electrical sys-
tem failure, electric shock, etc., be
sure to read owner's manual
before use.
Be sure to close the cover except
the time of use.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from
being discharged, do not use
the AC inverter while the
engine is not running.
When not using the AC invert-
er, make sure to turn off the AC
inverter (the indicator on the
button does not illuminate) and
close the AC inverter cover.
After using an electric acces-
sory or equipment, pull the
plug out. Leaving the accesso-
ry or equipment plugged in for
a long time may cause battery
discharge.
Do not use an electric acces-
sory or equipment the power
consumption of which is
greater than 200W(220V).
(Continued)
WARNING
To reduce a risk of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Do not use a heated electric
device such as a coffeepot,
toaster, heater, iron, etc.
Do not insert foreign objects
into the outlet and do not
touch the outlet as you may
get shocked.
Do not let children touch the
AC inverter.
ODMECO2070
4183
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB and iPod
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB (universal serial bus) port, you
can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and also in an iPod.
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
ONCDCO3053
(Continued)
• Some electric accessories or
equipments can cause elec-
tronic interference. It may
cause excessive audio noise
and malfunctions in other
electric systems or devices in
the vehicle.
Do not use broken electric
accessories or equipments,
which may damage the AC
inverter and electrical sys-
tems of the vehicle.
Do not use two or more elec-
tric accessories or equip-
ments at the same time. It may
cause damage to the electrical
systems of the vehicle.
When the input voltage is
under 11V, the outlet LED will
blink and the AC inverter will
turn off automatically. If the
input voltage goes up to nor-
mal, the AC inverter will turn
on again.
Features of your vehicle
1844
Clothes hanger Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
ODMECO2034
Type A Type B
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s
side floor mat anchors that
are designed to securely hold
the floor mat in place.To avoid
any interference with pedal
operation, we recommend
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehi-
cle be installed.
ODMECO2038
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes,
since those may damage the
hook.
Be careful when opening and
closing the doors. Clothes,
etc. may get caught between
the door gap.
4185
Features of your vehicle
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
NOTICE
Vehicles equipped with a luggage
rail system may use the shackles to
hook the luggage net.
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
ONCNCO3031
ONCNCO2029
ONCNCO3030
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
1864
To use the cargo security screen
1. Pull the cargo security screen
towards the rear of the vehicle by
the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide
(2).
NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen
with the handle in the center to pre-
vent the guide pin from falling out of
the guide.
When the cargo security screen is not
in use:
1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.
NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not
automatically slide back in if the
cargo security screen is not fully
pulled out. Fully pull it out and then
let go.
To remove the cargo security
screen
1. Push in the guide pin.
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.
ONCNCO3033
ONCNCO2034
ONCNCO3032
4187
Features of your vehicle
To remove the cargo security
screen from the luggage tray
1. Push in the guide pin.
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
ONCDCO3050
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possi-
bly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
Maintain the balance of the
vehicle and locate the weight
as forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed,
do not put luggage on it when it
is used.
ONCNCO2035
Features of your vehicle
1884
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof oper-
ation.
ODM042345
CAUTION
When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
WARNING
The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible onto the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity
will be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers or high speeds that may
result in loss of vehicle con-
trol or rollover resulting in an
accident.
(Continued)
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
4189
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carry-
ing items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carry-
ing large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driv-
ing to make sure the items on
the roof rack are securely fas-
tened.
Features of your vehicle
1904
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals. This antenna is a removable
type. To remove the antenna, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the
antenna, turn it clockwise.
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION
Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove surely the
antenna by rotating it counter-
clockwise. If not, the antenna
may be damaged.
When reinstalling your anten-
na, it is important that it is
fully tightened and adjusted to
the upright position to ensure
proper reception. The antenna
can be folded or removed
when parking the vehicle or
when loading cargo on the
roof rack.
When cargo is loaded on the
roof rack, do not place the
cargo near the antenna pole to
ensure proper reception.
OHM048154
Type A
Type B
4191
Features of your vehicle
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
The steering wheel audio remote
control button is installed to promote
safe driving.
MODE (1)
Press the button to select Radio, CD
(compact disc), USB or AUX (if
equipped).
SEEK ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8
second or more, it will work as fol-
lows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as fol-
lows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK
UP/DOWN button.
VOL (+ / -) (3)
Press the up button (+) to increase
volume.
Press the down button (-) to
decrease volume.
MUTE (4)
Press the MUTE button to cancel
the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
ODM042327
Features of your vehicle
1924
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted
by the radio antenna on your vehicle.
This signal is then received by the
radio and sent to your vehicle speak-
ers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some cases
the signal coming to your vehicle may
not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstruc-
tions so that they can provide better
signal coverage.
JBM001
JBM002
FM reception
AM (MW, LW) reception
4193
Features of your vehicle
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are eas-
ily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM004 JBM005JBM003
FM radio station
Features of your vehicle
1944
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as
far as possible from the audio equip-
ment.
Caring for disc
If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe it
from the center to the outside edge).
Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
4195
Features of your vehicle
Depending on the type of CD-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
manufacturing companies or mak-
ing and recording methods. In such
circumstances, continued use may
cause malfunctions to your audio
system.
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
1964
WARNING
Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunc-
tion. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to acci-
dents(fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
Use the system with the vehi-
cle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned off could result in
battery discharge.
(Continued)
4197
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not oper-
ate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations
may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
In case of product malfunc-
tion, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
Placing the audio system with-
in an electromagnetic environ-
ment may result in noise inter-
ference.
Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
CAUTION
Operating the device while
driving could lead to acci-
dents due to a lack of atten-
tion to external surroundings.
First park the vehicle before
operating the device.
Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1984
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the vehi-
cle. Connect the device after start-
ing up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
The System may not play inau-
thentic MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
Take precautions for static elec-
tricity when connecting or discon-
necting the external USB device.
An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connect-
ed external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode.
(e.g, Radio, CD)
Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device.
Do not use the USB device for pur-
poses other than playing music
files.
Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
4199
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia termi-
nal of the vehicle.
If the USB device is divided by log-
ical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are rec-
ognized by car audio.
Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-
stick type)
Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
Please avoid using USB
memory products which
can be used as key
chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could
cause damage to the USB jack.
Please make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
Features of your vehicle
2004
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPod
®
Mini
- iPod
®
4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic)
generation
- iPod
®
Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
Touch 1st~2nd generation
The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
If the iPod
®
disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod
®
.
(Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
An iPod
®
may not operate nor-
mally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected through
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have
audio Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology capability (such as for
stereo headphone Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ). The device
can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod
®
d device.
Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
If your iPhone
®
is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be prop-
erly played. In your iPhone
®
, select
the Dock connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change the
sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted com-
pletely, communications between
iPod
®
and audio may be interrupt-
ed.
When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod
®
and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod
®
when adjust-
ing the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod
®
.
When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable from
iPod
®
. Otherwise, iPod
®
may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
4201
Features of your vehicle
CD Player (for RDS model)
AM104DMEE, AM114DMEE
No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
2024
* : for columbia
No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
CD Player : AM100DMMG, AM110DMMG, AM111DMMG, AM101DMGG, AM110DMEE, AM112DMEE,
AM111DMEE, AM110DMGL, AM111DMGL*, AM100DMMN, AM110DMMN
4203
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(for RDS model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1
FM2 FMA AM AMA.
In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
3.
Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Operates Phone Screen
When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
Power Knob: Turns power
On/Off by pressing the knob
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
PHONE
61
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
2044
6.
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previ-
ous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
7.
FM : RDS Program Type Search
CD, MP3, USB mode : Folder
Search
8.
~
(Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9.
Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets
screen Off Screen On Screen
Off
Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
10.
• Radio Mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
11.
Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
ting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time setting
screen
12.
Displays menus for the current
mode.
iPod
®
List : Move to parent category
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
TA/SCAN
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
PTY
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
4205
Features of your vehicle
13. TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches .songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right
When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
14. DISC-IN LED
LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted
15.
• Changes to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1
FM2 FMA.
16.
• Changes to AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of AM
AMA.
AM
FM
Features of your vehicle
2064
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1
FM2 AM.
In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
3.
Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio mode.
In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Operates Phone Screen
When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
PHONE
61
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
4207
Features of your vehicle
6.
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previ-
ous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
7.
CD MP3, USB mode : Folder
Search
8.
~
(Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9.
Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets
screen Off Screen On Screen
Off
Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
10.
• Radio Mode
- Press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each song (file)
for 10 seconds each
Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
11.
Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
ting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time setting
screen
12.
Displays menus for the current
mode.
iPod
®
List : Move to parent category
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
SCAN
DISP
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2084
13. TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right
When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
14. DISC-IN LED
LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted.
15.
• Changes to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1
FM2.
16.
• Changes to AM mode.
AM
FM
4209
Features of your vehicle
SETUP (for RDS model)
-
AM104DMEE, AM114DMEE
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes .
selection mode
During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Scroll text
[Scroll text] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
: Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
2
RDM
SETUP
Off
On
Off
On
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2104
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Audio Settings] Select
menu through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
Return : While adjusting values,
re-pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Virtual Sound
The PoewrBass, PowerTreble, and
Surround can be set.
Select [Virtual Sound] Set menu
through TUNE knob Set /
through TUNE knob
PowerBass : This is a sound sys-
tem feature that provides live bass.
PowerTreble : This is a sound sys-
tem feature that provides live trem-
ble.
Surround : This is a sound system
feature that provides surround
sound.
May differ depending on the select-
ed audio.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Volume Dialogue
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set vol-
ume of TUNE knob
Off
On
4211
Features of your vehicle
Clock Settings
Press the key Select
[Clock] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Day Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
3
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
2124
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through TUNE knob
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
/ through TUNE knob
: Displays time/date on screen
• : Turn off.
Automatic RDS Time
This option is used to automatically
set the time by synchronizing with
RDS.
Select [Automatic RDS Time] Set
/ through TUNE knob
: Turn on Automatic Time
• : Turn off.
Off
On
OffOn
Off
On
OffOn
4213
Features of your vehicle
Phone Setup
(for RDS,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Press the key Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone] Set through
TUNE knob
Search for device names as dis-
played on your mobile phone and
connect.
Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up
to 3 minutes. If pairing is not com-
pleted within the 3 minutes, the
mobile phone pairing process will
automatically be canceled.
Pairing completion is displayed.
In some mobile phones, pairing
will automatically be followed by
connection.
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
SETUP
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and con-
nection processes are first
required. As a result, you can-
not pair your mobile phone
while driving the vehicle. First
park your vehicle before use.
Features of your vehicle
2144
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the cur-
rently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Connect Phone]
Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
Connect the selected mobile
phone.
Connection completion is dis-
played.
If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to con-
nect.
Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Disconnect Phone]
Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
4215
Features of your vehicle
Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (pri-
ority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
Select [Priority].
From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
Once the connection sequence
(priority) is changed, the new no. 1
priority mobile phone will be con-
nected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected: Automatically attempts
to connect the most recently con-
nected phone.
- Cases when the most recently
connected phone cannot be con-
nected: Attempts to connect in the
order in which paired phones are
listed.
- The connected phone will auto-
matically be changed to No. 1 pri-
ority.
Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Delete]
Select the desired mobile phone.
Delete the selected mobile phone.
Deletion completion is displayed.
When attempting to delete a cur-
rently connected phone, the phone
is first disconnected.
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download
phone book and call histories into
the audio system.
Select [Phone book Download]
Select through TUNE knob
CAUTION
The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
If a different operation is per-
formed while phone book is
being downloaded, download-
ing will be discontinued.
Phone book already down-
loaded will be saved.
When downloading new phone
book, delete all previously
saved phone book before start-
ing download.
CAUTION
When you delete a mobile
phone, the mobile phone
phone book will also be erased.
For stable Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
2164
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone can be played
through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-
ume through TUNE knob
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set
through TUNE knob
If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connect-
ed phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
SEEK
TRACK
Off
On
Off
On
CAUTION
The Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming
feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
4217
Features of your vehicle
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology when the system is cur-
rently off, follow these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Screen
Guidance
Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be used and dis-
plays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Select [Phone]
A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
will be displayed.
On the screen, select to turn
on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and display guidance.
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system is turned on,
the system will automatically try to
connect the most recently connect-
ed
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
YES
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
PHONE
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these next
steps to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within
the mobile phone ON/OFF
and try to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect
again.
3) Completely remove the
mobile phone battery, reboot,
and then try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and
try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in
your mobile phone and the
audio system and pair again
for use.
Features of your vehicle
2184
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
VRS Mode
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [VRS Mode] Set through
TUNE knob
Normal : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
Expert : This mode is for expert
users and omits some information
during voice command operation.
(When using Expert mode, guid-
ance instructions can be heard
through the [Help] or [Menu] com-
mands.
May differ depending on the
selected audio.
SETUP
4219
Features of your vehicle
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
Language support by region
-
Features of your vehicle
2204
SETUP
-
AM100DMMG, AM110DMMG,
AM111DMMG, AM101DMGG,
AM110DMEE, AM112DMEE,
AM111DMEE, AM110DMGL,
AM111DMGL, AM100DMMN,
AM110DMMN
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes .
selection mode
During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll ] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
: Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
2
RDM
SETUP
Off
On
Off
On
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
SETUP
4221
Features of your vehicle
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
Return : While adjusting values,
re-pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Virtual Sound
The PoewrBass, PowerTreble, and
Surround can be set.
Select [Virtual Sound] Set menu
through TUNE knob Set
/ through TUNE knob
PowerBass : This is a sound system
feature that provides live bass.
PowerTreble :This is a sound system
feature that provides live tremble.
Surround : This is a sound system
feature that provides surround
sound.
May differ depending on the select-
ed audio.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Off
On
Features of your vehicle
2224
Clock Settings
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings] Set
through TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
3
SETUP
CLOCK
4223
Features of your vehicle
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
/ through TUNE knob
: Displays time/date on screen
• : Turn off.
Phone Setup
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Press the key Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
Select [Pair Phone] Set through
TUNE knob
Search for device names as dis-
played on your mobile phone and
connect.
Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up
to 3 minutes. If pairing is not com-
pleted within the 3 minutes, the
mobile phone pairing process will
automatically be canceled.
SETUP
Off
On
OffOn
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and con-
nection processes are first
required. As a result, you can-
not pair your mobile phone
while driving the vehicle. First
park your vehicle before use.
Features of your vehicle
2244
Pairing completion is displayed.
In some mobile phones, pairing
will automatically be followed by
connection.
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the cur-
rently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
• Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Connect Phone]
Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
Connect the selected mobile
phone.
Connection completion is dis-
played.
If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connect-
ed phone and select a new phone
to connect.
4225
Features of your vehicle
• Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Disconnect Phone]
Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (pri-
ority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
Select [Priority].
From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
Once the connection sequence
(priority) is changed, the new no. 1
priority mobile phone will be con-
nected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected: Automatically attempts
to connect the most recently con-
nected phone.
- Cases when the most recently
connected phone cannot be con-
nected: Attempts to connect in the
order in which paired phones are
listed.
- The connected phone will auto-
matically be changed to No. 1 pri-
ority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob
Select [Delete]
Select the desired mobile phone.
Delete the selected mobile phone.
Deletion completion is displayed.
When attempting to delete a cur-
rently connected phone, the phone
is first disconnected.
CAUTION
When you delete a mobile
phone, the mobile phone con-
tacts will also be erased.
For stable Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
2264
CAUTION
The Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming
feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
Contacts Download
This feature is used to download
contacts and call histories into the
audio system.
Select [Contacts Download] Select
through TUNE knob
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new Contacts and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone can be played
through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-
ume through TUNE knob
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
Off
On
Off
On
CAUTION
The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
If a different operation is per-
formed while Contacts are
being downloaded, download-
ing will be discontinued.
Contacts already downloaded
will be saved.
When downloading new
Contacts, delete all previously
saved Contacts before start-
ing download.
4227
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set
through TUNE knob
If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connect-
ed phone and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology when the system is cur-
rently off, follow these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Screen
Guidance
Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be used and dis-
plays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology through the Key
Press the key Select [Phone]
A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology will
be displayed.
On the screen, select to turn
on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and display guidance.
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system is turned on, the
system will automatically try to con-
nect the most recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
YES
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
PHONE
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become inter-
mittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these
next steps to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone ON/OFF and try
to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect
again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and
try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in
your mobile phone and the
audio system and pair again
for use.
Features of your vehicle
2284
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
Language support by region
- , English
SETUP
4229
Features of your vehicle
RADIO (for RDS model)
Changing RADIO mode
Press the key to change the
mode in order of FM1 FM2 FMA
AM AMA.
Press the or key to
change the mode in order of FM1
FM2 and AM.
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays
the change radio mode pop up
screen. While the pop up screen is
displayed, you can change the
radio mode ( : FM1 FM2
FMA AM AMA / : FM1
FM2 / : AM) through the
tune knob or ~ keys.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically search-
es for the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): The broadcast fre-
quency increases and previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
TA/SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
51
AM
FM
RADIO
AMFM
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
2304
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• AM104DMEE/ AM114DMEE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds): Set /
TA Traffic Announcement) mode.
PTY Up/Down
Press the key when
searching PTY in RDS Broadcasting
Program Type selection.
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [ AST]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save fre-
quencies with superior reception to
presets
~ . If no frequen-
cies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
Saves only to the Preset memory
~ of FMA or AMA mode.
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the key Set [ AF]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Alternative Frequency option
can be turned On/Off.
Region
Press the key Set [
Region] through TUNE knob or
key.
The Region option can be turned
On/Off.
News
Press the key Set [ News]
through TUNE knob or key.
The News option can be turned
On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound vol-
ume upon receiving News or Traffic
information.
The info volume can be controlled by
turning the VOL knob left/right while
a news or traffic broadcast is playing.
AF, Region, and News are RDS
Radio menus.
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
61
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
PTY
FOLDER
OffOn
TA/SCAN
4231
Features of your vehicle
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
Changing RADIO mode
Press the key to change the
mode in order of FM1 FM2 AM.
Press the or key to
change the mode in order of FM1
FM2 and AM.
When the power is off, press the
or key to
turn on the audio system and
receive radio broadcasts.
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays
the change radio mode pop up
screen. While the pop up screen is
displayed, you can change the radio
mode ( : FM1 FM2 AM
/ : FM1 FM2 / : AM)
through the tune knob or ~
keys.
SEEK
Press the key
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically search-
es for the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequen-
cy increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
5
1
AMFM
RADIO
AMFMRADIO
AMFM
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
2324
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
AM110DMEE/AM111DMEE/
AM112DMEE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
• AM110DMMG/AM110DMMG/
AM111DMMG/AM101DMGG/
AM101DMCG/AM111DMCG
- FM : Changes by 100KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
AM110DMGL/AM100DMMN/
AM110DMMN
- FM : Changes by 200KHz
- AM : Changes by 10khz
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [
A.Store] through TUNE knob or
key.
Select A.Store(Auto Store) to save
frequencies with superior reception
to presets
~ . If no fre-
quencies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4233
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mod mode in order of CD USB(iPod
®
)
AUX My Music BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
To repeat one song (Shortly press-
ing the key (under 0.8 seconds)):
Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2344
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
Random (Shortly pressing the key ):
Plays all songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing
the key): Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on
screen
Random (pressing twice): Plays all
files in random order.
iPod
®
mode: RDM on screen
Random (press the key) : Plays all
files in random order.
Press the key again to turn
off random.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
current song from the beginning.
If the key is pressed
again within 1 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
next song.
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan (for RDS model)
While song (file) is playing
key
Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Scans all songs for
10 seconds starting from the next
song.
Pressing and holding the
key again to turn off.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs from
the next song for 10 seconds each.
Press the key again to turn
off.
The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
SCAN
SCAN
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
4235
Features of your vehicle
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing /
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
/ (Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
Searching Songs (File)
Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2364
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [
F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or
key to randomly play songs
within the current folder.
Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [
A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key to randomly play all
songs within the CD.
Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4237
Features of your vehicle
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat
off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to parent cate-
gory.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2384
MENU : My Music Mode
(if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing
song.
Deletes file from list
Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4239
Features of your vehicle
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [
Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
After selecting, press the
key and select the delete menu.
NOTICE - Using the My Music
Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
5
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2404
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
(if equipped)
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks is under
license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective
owners. A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell
phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On.
Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
Press the key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob
Select [Audio Streaming] through
the TUNE knob Set /
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD USB AUX
My Music BT Audio.
If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
• Play / Pause
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
MEDIA
OffOn
SETUP
4241
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone features
In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you
do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connec-
tion, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
power to OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2. MUTE button : Mute the micro-
phone during a call.
3. button : Activates voice recog-
nition.
4. button : Places and transfers
calls.
5. button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
Redialing the most recently called
number
Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
The most recently called number
is redialed.
Features of your vehicle
2424
Phone MENU (for RDS model)
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone Book,
Phone Setup).
Call history
Press the key Set [
History] through the TUNE knob
or key.
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call his-
tory is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Phone Book
Press the key Set [ P.
Book] through the TUNE knob or
key.
The phone book is displayed and
can be used to select a number and
make a call.
If more than one number is saved
to one contact, then a screen
showing the mobile phone num-
ber, Home and office number is
displayed. Select the desired num-
ber to make the call.
If phone book do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download phone
book is displayed. (The download
feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [ Setup]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is dis-
played. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
3
PHONE
2
RDM
PHONE
1
RPT
PHONE
PHONE
4243
Features of your vehicle
Phone MENU
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Contacts, Phone
Setup).
Call history
Press the key Set [ History]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call his-
tory is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Contacts
Press the key Set [
Contacts] through the TUNE knob
or key.
The Contacts are displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If more than one number is saved
to one contact, then a screen
showing the mobile phone num-
ber, Home and office number is
displayed. Select the desired num-
ber to make the call.
If Contacts do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download
Contacts is displayed. (The down-
load feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [
Setup] through the TUNE knob or
key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is dis-
played. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
3
PHONE
2
RDM
PHONE
1
RPT
PHONE
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2444
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CELLULAR PHONE
Do not use a cellular phone or per-
form Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology -enabled phones may
not be recognized by the system or
fully compatible with the system.
Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area (e.g. in a tun-
nel, in a underground, in a moun-
tainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system or cel-
lular service stations can be dis-
turbed.
While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology your phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-related operations.
Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio sys-
tem. In this case, store the device
in a different location may resolve
the condition.
Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected.
Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection, turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature off.
The hands-free call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone type.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features can be used only when the
mobile phone has been paired and
connected with the device. For
more information on pairing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phones, refer to the “Phone Setup”
section.
(Continued)
4245
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone is con-
nected, a ( ) icon will appear at
the top of the screen. If a ( ) icon
is not displayed, this indicates that
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled device has not been con-
nected. You must connect the
device before use. For more infor-
mation on Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phones, refer
to the “Phone Setup” section.
Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
Some features may not be sup-
ported in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
and devices.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled operation may be unsta-
ble depending on the communica-
tion state.
Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
Features of your vehicle
2464
NOTICE - USING VOICE COM-
MAND
The voice recognition feature of
this product supports recognition
of the commands listed within this
user’s manual.
While using voice recognition,
operating the steering remote con-
trol or the device will terminate
voice recognition and allow you to
manually operate desired func-
tions.
Position the microphone above the
head of the driver’s seat. For supe-
rior performance, maintain good
posture when saying voice com-
mands.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Voice recognition may not func-
tion properly due to outside noise.
The following conditions can
affect the performance of Voice
Recognition:
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating/cooling system
is on
- When passing a tunnel
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
After downloading Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
the system requires some times to
convert the phone book into voice
information. During this time,
voice recognition may not operate
properly.
Upon inputting your phone book,
special symbols and numbers can-
not be recognized by voice. For
example, “# John Doe%&” will be
recognized as “John Doe”.
4247
Features of your vehicle
VOICE COMMAND
(if equipped)
Starting Voice Command
To start voice command, shortly
press the key on the steering
wheel remote controller.
If voice command is in [Normal
Mode], then the system will say
“Please say a command. Beep”
If voice command is in [Expert
Mode], then the system will only
say a “Beep-”
Setting Voice command [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:
Press the key Select
[System] through the TUNE
knob or key Select [Voice
Command Mode] through the
TUNE knob Set [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]
• Say the voice command.
NOTICE
For proper voice recognition, say the
voice command after the guidance
message and the “Beep” sound.
Skipping the Guidance
Message
While the guidance message is
being stated, shortly press the
key (under 0.8 seconds) to discontin-
ue the guidance message and sound
the “beep”.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Ending Voice Command
While using voice command, press
and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to end voice command.
• While using voice command, press-
ing the steering wheel remote con-
troller or a different key will end
voice command.
• In a state where the system is wait-
ing for your voice command, say
“cancel” or “end” to end voice com-
mand.
• In a state where the system is wait-
ing for your voice command, short-
ly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) to end voice command.
5
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2484
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being
stated
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book
Please say the name of the Phone book
you want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Beep-
Beep-
Beep-
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
4249
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
FM2FMAAMAMA)
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Features of your vehicle
2504
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say
the track number to play the corresponding
track.
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen.
After manually operate the device to select
and play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Search iPod
®
Moves to the iPod
®
file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4251
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
Features of your vehicle
2524
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
4253
Features of your vehicle
My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Features of your vehicle
2544
APPENDIX
Name Description
AST (A.store) Automatically selects and saves
channels
SDVC Speed Dependent Volume
Control
4255
Features of your vehicle
CD Player (for RDS model) : AM904DMEE, AM914DMEE
No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
2564
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(for RDS,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1
FM2 FMA AM AMA.
3.
• Start Media mode
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
) AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Converts to Phone mode
When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
5. PWR/VOL knob
Power : Press to turn power
on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control
volume.
6.
When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : changes the track, Song(file)
When pressed and held (0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays
the current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
7.
RDS Radio mode : searches RDS
program types.
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches
folders.
PTY
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
4257
Features of your vehicle
8.
Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. CLOCK
Displays the time/date/day.
10.
• Radio Mode :
- Short key : TA On/Off
- Long key : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 5 seconds each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
- Long key : Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
11.
Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted.
14. RESET
Forced system termination and
system restart.
SETUP
TA/SCAN
Features of your vehicle
2584
Audio Head Unit
15.
Changes to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1
FM2
FMA.
16.
• Changes to AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of AM
AMA.
17.
• Start Media mode
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music.
MEDIA
AM
FM
4259
Features of your vehicle
CD Player : AM900DMMG, AM910DMMG, AM911DMMG, AM901DMGG, AM910DMEE, AM912DMEE,
AM911DMEE, AM910DMGL, AM911DMGL*, AM900DMMN, AM910DMMN
* : for columbia
No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
2604
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of
FM1FM2AM.
3.
• Start Media mode
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
) AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Converts to Phone mode
When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
Power : Press to turn power
on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control
volume.
6.
When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
When pressed and held (0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the
current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
7.
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches
folders.
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
4261
Features of your vehicle
8.
Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. CLOCK
Displays the time/date/day.
10.
Radio Mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds each
Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes
: previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
11.
Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
Radio mode : turn to change broad-
cast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted.
14. RESET
Forced system termination and
system restart.
Audio Head Unit
15.
• Converts to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1
FM2.
16.
• Converts to AM mode.
17.
• Start Media mode
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music.
MEDIA
AM
FM
SETUP
SCAN
DISP
Features of your vehicle
2624
Steering wheel remote controller
1. VOLUME
• Used to control volume.
2. MUTE
• Mutes audio volume.
3. SEEK
When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast
frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music/BT
Audio) modes : changes the track,
file or chapter.
When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically search-
es broadcast frequencies and
channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
4. MODE
Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
FM2 FMA AM AMA USB or
iPod
®
AUX My MusicBT Audio
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
5. (if equipped)
When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command wait-
ing state
When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
.
4263
Features of your vehicle
6.
When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
7.
• Ends phone call
Features of your vehicle
2644
Radio Mode
(for RDS model)
- AM904DMEE, AM914DMEE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6]
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets
5. Autostore
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
6. RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu
7. RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
FM2FMAAMAMA.
Pressing the or key
to change the operating mode in
order of FM1FM2FMA and AM
AMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
AMFM
RADIO
4265
Features of your vehicle
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz
AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting/Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
tons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the
current frequency to the selected
preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
NOTICE
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
61
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2664
RDS Menu
Press the button to set the AF
(Alternative Frequency), Region and
News features.
NOTICE
The RDS Menu is not supported
within AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview frequencies
with superior reception for 5 seconds
each.
NOTICE
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) will cancel the scan
operation.
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
4267
Features of your vehicle
Program Type
Press the key to search
for the desired Program type.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired program type.
Once you find the desired program
type, press the TUNE knob.
After selecting the desired Program
Type and while the Program Type is
blinking (approximately 5 seconds),
pressing the key will allow
you to select a different Program
Type broadcast.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the key to turn the TA
(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
PTY
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2684
RADIO MODE
- AM900DMMG, AM910DMMG,
AM911DMMG, AM901DMGG,
AM910DMEE, AM912DMEE,
AM911DMEE, AM910DMGL,
AM900DMMN, AM910DMMN
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6]
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons
5. Autostore
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
FM2AM
Press the or key to
change the mode in order of FM1
FM2 and AM.
If [Mode Pop-up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
AMFM
RADIO
4269
Features of your vehicle
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by 100kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
tons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the
current frequency to the selected
preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
NOTICE
• Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
• While Scan is operating, pressing
the key will cancel the
scan operation.
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
A.store
61
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2704
NOTICE - USING THE DISCS
This device has been manufac-
tured to be compatible with soft-
ware bearing the following logo
marks.
Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-
uids, benzene, or thinners.
After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to prevent
disc scratches.
Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
Do not introduce foreign sub-
stances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign sub-
stances could damage the device
interior.
Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and
playing times may occur depend-
ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-
duction method and the recording
method as used by the user.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a
soft cloth.
The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also
result in noise while playing.
Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems per-
sist, trying using a different CD as
continued use may result in mal-
functions.
The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CD-
RW Drive Software.
Copy-protected CDs such as S-
type CDs may not function in the
device. DATA discs cannot be
played. (However, such discs may
still operate but will do so abnor-
mally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-
shaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 sec-
onds, the disc will automatically
be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
4271
Features of your vehicle
MP3 File Information
• Supported Audio Formats
ISO 9660 Level 1
ISO 9660 Level 2
Romeo / Juliet (128 characters)
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X
& 8.X
File formats that do not comply
with the above formats may not be
properly recognized or play with-
out properly displaying file names
or other information.
• Support for Compressed Files
1. Supported Bitrates (Kbps)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3 Layer3 Layer3
High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
2. Sampling Frequencies (Hz)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
3000 16000 8000 48000
For MP3/WMA compression files,
differences in sound quality will
occur depending on the bitrate.
(Higher sound quality can be expe-
rienced with higher bitrates.)
This device only recognizes files
with MP3/WMA extensions. Other
file extensions may not be properly
recognized.
3. Maximum number of recognized
folders and files
- Folder : 255 folders for CD, 2,000
folders for USB
- File : 999 files for CD, 6,000 files for
USB
There are no limitations to the
number of recognized folder levels
File System
Audio
Compression
BIT RATE(kbps)
Features of your vehicle
2724
• Language Support
(Unicode Support)
1. English: 94 characters
2. Special characters and Symbols :
986 characters
Languages other than Korean and
English (including Chinese) are
not included.
3. Text Display (Based on Unicode)
- File name: Maximum 64 English
characters
- Folder name: Max 32 English
characters
Using the scroll feature allows you
to see the entire name of files with
names that are too long to be dis-
played at once.
• Compatibility by Disc Type
1. Playing MIXED CDs: First plays
the audio CD, then plays the com-
pressed file(s).
2. Playing EXTRA CDs: First plays
the audio CD, then plays the com-
pressed file(s).
3. Playing multisession CDs: Plays in
order of sessions
- MIXED CD : CD type in which
both MP3 and audio CD files are
recognized in one disc.
- Multisession CD CD type that
includes more than two sessions.
Different from Extra CDs, multi-
session CDs are recorded by
sessions and have no media limi-
tation.
• Precautions upon Writing CDs
1. In all cases except when creating
multisession discs, check the
close session option before creat-
ing the disc. Though product mal-
functions will not occur, some time
may be required for the device to
check whether the session state is
closed (approximately 25 sec-
onds). (Additional time may also
be required depending on the
number of folders or files.)
2. Changing the MP3/WMA file
extensions or changing files of
other extensions to MP3/WMA
may result in product malfunction.
3. When naming files with MP3/WMA
file extensions, write using only
Korean and English. (Languages
other than Korean and English are
not supported and are displayed
as blank.)
4. Unauthorized use or duplication of
music files are prohibited by law.
4273
Features of your vehicle
5. Prolonged use of CD-R/CD-RW
discs that do not satisfy related
standards and/or specifications
could result in product malfunc-
tion.
6. Unauthorized use or duplication of
MP3/WMA files is prohibited by
law.
Features of your vehicle
2744
MEDIA MODE
- AM910DMMG, AM911DMMG,
AM912DMEE, AM910DMMN,
AM914DMEE
Switching to Media Mode
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD
USB (iPod
®
) AUX My Music
BT Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] / [Mode Pop-up] is
turned on within [Display],
then pressing the key will dis-
play the Media Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
MEDIA MODE
- AM900DMMG, AM901DMMG,
AM910DMEE, AM911DMEE,
AM910DMGL, AM900DMMN,
AM904DMEE
Switching to Media Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of
CDUSB(iPod
®
)AUXMy Music.
If [Pop-up Mode] / [Mode Pop-up] is
turned on within [Display],
then pressing the key will
display the Media Pop-up Mode
screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
4275
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
<for RDS model>
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion
3. Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2764
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
<for RDS model>
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track
information is included within the
audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
Pressing the key before
the track has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous track.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4277
Features of your vehicle
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 sec-
onds of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again
to turn off.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Press the key again to turn off.
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
<for RDS model>
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2784
Info
Press the ( )button to dis-
play details about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the ( )button to play
tracks in random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn the
Random(Shuffle) feature off.
Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in
random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the ( )button to
repeat the current track. Press the
button again to turn the repeat fea-
ture off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current track.
List
Press the ( )button to dis-
play the track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
4279
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
<for RDS model>
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2804
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
<for RDS model>
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
NOTICE
Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 sec-
onds of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again
to turn off.
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4281
Features of your vehicle
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Press the key again to turn off.
Searching Folders
Press the
(
)
key to select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
<for RDS model>
Info
Press the ( )button to dis-
play details about the current file.
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Info
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
SCAN
Features of your vehicle
2824
Random(Shuffle)
Press the ( )button to play
files in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder
Random (Shuffle)
AllOff.
Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the ( )button to
repeat the current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
Repeat FolderOff.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the ( )button to
copy the current file into My Music.
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.
List
Press the ( )button to dis-
play the file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
ListCopy
Repeat
Shuffle
4283
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if it
is already connected when the
ignition is turned on.The USB
device may not operate properly if
the car ignition is turned on or off
with the USB device connected.
Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not proper-
ly recognize the USB is in some
states.
Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file for-
mat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
Avoid contact between the USB
connector with bodily parts or for-
eign objects.
Repeated connecting/disconnect-
ing of USB devices within short
periods of time may result in prod-
uct malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may dif-
fer depending on the type, size or
file formats stored in the USB.
Such differences in time are not
indications of malfunctions.
The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead
to worsened performance or dam-
age to the device.
The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately pur-
chased USB hubs and extension
cables are being used. Connect the
USB directly with the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
The device may not operate nor-
mally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
device.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
2844
(Continued)
Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly rec-
ognized.
The device may not operate prop-
erly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection fail-
ures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB
jack.
Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
4285
Features of your vehicle
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
<for RDS model>
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion
3. File Index
Displays the current file number
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2864
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
<for RDS model>
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
Loading may require additional
time if there are many files and
folders within the USB and result
in faulty list display or file search-
ing. Normal operations will resume
once loading is complete.
The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal Cover
Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4287
Features of your vehicle
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 sec-
onds of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again
to turn off.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Press the key again to turn off.
Searching Folders
Press the
(
)key
to select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2884
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
<for RDS model>
Info
Press the ( )button to dis-
play details about the current file.
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the ( )button to
play files in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder
Random
(Shuffle) AllOff.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the ( )button to
repeat the current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
Repeat Folder Off.
Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current
file.
Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Repeat
ShuffleInfo
4289
Features of your vehicle
Copying Files
Press the ( )button to
copy the current file into My Music.
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.
List
Press the ( )button to dis-
play the file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
ListCopy
Features of your vehicle
2904
NOTICE - USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
•iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
In order to use the iPod
®
while
operating the keys, you must use a
dedicated iPod
®
cable. (the cable
that is supplied when purchasing
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products)
If the iPod
®
is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds imme-
diately after connecting. If possi-
ble, connect the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle with the iPod
®
stopped/paused.
During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable
will charge the iPod
®
through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod
®
, and
the audio system are both active,
EQ effects could overlap and cause
sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used, dis-
connect the device for storage.
When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
If your iPhone is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone
®
,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
•iPod
®
mode cannot be operated
when the iPod
®
cannot be recog-
nized due to the playing of ver-
sions that do not support commu-
nication protocols, cases of
iPod
®
abnormalities and defects.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be rec-
ognized when the battery level is
low. Please charge the iPod
®
for
use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod
®
device may differ with
the orders shown within the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to
an iPod
®
device defect, reset the
iPod
®
and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod
®
manual)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with the
System depending on its version.
If the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the sys-
tem may not properly restore the
previously operated mode. (iPad
charging is not supported.)
4291
Features of your vehicle
iPod MODE
Basic Mode Screen
<for RDS model>
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-
plays the currently operating function
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs
4. Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
9. List
Moves to the list screen
Features of your vehicle
2924
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin play-
ing an iPod
®
song.
<for RDS model>
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
iPod
®
s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
Pressing the key before
the song has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4293
Features of your vehicle
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
<for RDS model>
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
Home, and features.
<for RDS model>
1. : Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod
®
root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
Features of your vehicle
2944
NOTICE
If the search mode is accessed
while playing a song, the most
recently searched category is dis-
played.
Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod
®
device.
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
<for RDS model>
Random(Shuffle)
Press the ( )button to
play songs in random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn the
random(Shuffle)feature off.
Repeat
Press the ( )button to
repeat the current song. Press the
button again to turn the repeat fea-
ture off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
Repeat
Shuffle
4295
Features of your vehicle
List
Press the ( )button to dis-
play the Category Menu.
<for RDS model>
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
NOTICE
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
The AUX volume can be con-
trolled separately from other
audio modes.
Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the con-
nector jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
MEDIA
List
Features of your vehicle
2964
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
<for RDS model>
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
10. Delete
Deletes the current file
11. List
Moves to the list screen
4297
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
<for RDS model>
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will
be disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
<for RDS model>
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2984
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan(for RDS model)
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to play the first 10 sec-
onds of each file.
Pressing and holding the key again
to turn off.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Press the key again to turn off.
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.
<for RDS model>
Info
Press the ( )button to dis-
play details about the current file.
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Info
SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4299
Features of your vehicle
Random
Press the ( )button to
play files in random order. Press the
button again to turn the Random fea-
ture off.
Repeat
Press the ( )button to
repeat the current song. Press the
button again to turn the repeat fea-
ture off.
Deleting Files
Press the ( )button to
delete the current file.
List
Press the ( )button to dis-
play the file list screen.
<for RDS model>
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
<for RDS model>
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
Features of your vehicle
3004
Press the ( )button or
individually select the files you want
to delete. Once files are selected, the
( )button and
( )buttons will be enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Select All: Selects all files
3) Unselet All: Deselects all selected
files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the ( )but-
ton to delete the selected files.
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
To check memory information, go
to [System] [Memory
Information]
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone has been con-
nected.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
Receiving an incoming call or
making an outgoing call while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio may result in
audio interference.
SETUP
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
4301
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected,
press the key [Phone] but-
ton to display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connection
screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
NOTICE
If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio is not operating
properly, check whether the fea-
ture is turned off at
[Phone] [Audio streaming]
(Streaming Audio). If the feature
is off, turn back on and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from
your mobile device after convert-
ing to Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio mode, pressing
the play button once may start
playing the mode. Check to see
that music is playing from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
3024
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(for RDS,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
refers to a short-distance wireless
networking technology which uses a
2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz frequency to
connect various devices within a cer-
tain distance.
Supported within PCs, external
devices,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones, PDAs, various
electronic devices, and automotive
environments,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car
audio system with a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology , carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
Do not operate the device
excessively while driving.
Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time is dan-
gerous and may lead to acci-
dents. When driving, view the
screen only for short periods of
time.
4303
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING UPON
CONNECTING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
PHONE
Before connecting the car audio
system with the mobile phone,
check to see that the mobile phone
supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology features.
Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the
hidden state or turn on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power prior to searching/connect-
ing with the car audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you do not want to automatical-
ly connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone, try
the following.
1. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
- For more information on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features within your mobile,
refer to your mobile phone
user’s manual.
2. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
> [Phone] and [turn off]
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Park the vehicle when connecting
the car audio system with your
mobile phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection may become intermit-
tently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1. Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3 Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
(Continued)
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3044
(Continued)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Answering and placing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection - Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologydevice is already con-
nected.
When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is being con-
nected, the connection process
cannot be canceled.
•Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio related features will operate
within this system.
Normal operation is possible only
for devices that support Handsfree
or audio features, such as a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio device.
Only one function can be used at a
time between the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio. (While playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio, streaming will end upon
entering the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone screen.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected for various reasons,
such as being out of range, turning
the device OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automati-
cally searched and connected.
Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
4305
Features of your vehicle
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Device : Name of device as
shown when searching from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
3064
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
NOTICE
The waiting period during phone
pairing will last for one minute.
The pairing process will fail if the
device is not paired within the
given time. If the pairing process
fails, you must start the process
from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices will
automatically connect once pairing
is complete. However, some devices
may require a separate verification
process to connect. Check to see
whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology has been properly con-
nected within your mobile phone.
List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed
at [Phone] [Paired Phone
List].
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
4307
Features of your vehicle
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3084
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones. However, the most
recently connected phone will always
be set as the highest priority.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu. The selected
device will be changed to the high-
est priority.
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a
different device, the currently con-
nected phone will always be set as the
highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
SETUP
SETUP
4309
Features of your vehicle
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
NOTICE
When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and phone
book data will also be deleted.
To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings
NOTICE
If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks whether to download call his-
tory data.
If you press the [Phone book] but-
ton but there is no phone book
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks whether to download phone
book data.
This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
PHONE
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3104
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered,
switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
NOTICE
When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and
SETUP mode features are dis-
abled. Only the call volume will
operate.
The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
PHONE
4311
Features of your vehicle
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to
download the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
NOTICE
• The call history list will display up
to 30 outgoing, incoming, and
missed calls.
Upon downloading call histories,
previously saved histories are
deleted.
Incoming calls with hidden caller
IDs will not be saved in the call
history list.
Previously saved phone book
entries are stored even if a device
is disconnected and re-connected.
The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
3124
Phone Book
Press the key Select
[Phone book]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
1) Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone
book entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download phone book
entries
NOTICE
Up to 1,000 phone book entries can
be copied into car phone book.
Upon downloading phone book
data, previously saved phone book
data will be deleted.
Downloading is not possible if the
phone book download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download. If downloading cannot
be normally conducted, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device setting or the screen state.
Caller ID information will not be
displayed for unsaved callers.
The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
PHONE
4313
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology wireless technolo-
gy Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Device : Name of device as
shown when searching from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
5.Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
3144
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering remote controller displays
the following screen. Press the [Pair]
button to pair a new device or press
the [Connect] to connect a previous-
ly pair device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
the steps described in the “When No
Devices have been Paired” section.
NOTICE
The waiting period during phone
pairing will last for one minute.
The pairing process will fail if the
device is not paired within the
given time. If the pairing process
fails, you must start the process
from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices will
automatically connect once pairing
is complete. However, some devices
may require a separate verification
process to connect. Check to see
whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology has been properly con-
nected within your mobile phone.
List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed
at [Phone] [Paired Phone
List].
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
4315
Features of your vehicle
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
As a result, the “Change Priority’ fea-
ture is used to set the connection pri-
ority of paired phones. However, the
most recently connected phone will
always be set as the highest priority.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP
Connect
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3164
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to change to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a
different device, the currently con-
nected phone will always be set as the
highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
Delete
SETUP
Disconnect
SETUP
Change priority
4317
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings
NOTICE
If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks whether to download call his-
tory data.
If you press the [contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks whether to download
contacts data.
This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
3184
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered,
switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
NOTICE
When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and
SETUP mode features are dis-
abled. Only the call volume will
operate.
The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
PHONE
4319
Features of your vehicle
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download contacts
entries
Download
PHONE
Download
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
3204
NOTICE
Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be
copied into car contacts.
Upon downloading contacts data,
previously saved contacts data will
be deleted.
Downloading is not possible if the
contacts download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download. If downloading cannot
be normally conducted, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device setting or the screen state.
Caller ID information will not be
displayed for unsaved callers.
The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device sup-
ports the download feature.
4321
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE - USING THE
Voice Recognition
When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the opera-
tion of the voice recognition sys-
tem, pressing any key other than
the key or touching the screen
will terminate voice recognition
mode.
For superior voice recognition
performance, position the micro-
phone used for voice recognition
above the head of the driver’s seat
and maintain a proper position
when saying commands.
Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
(Continued)
(Continued)
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
Features of your vehicle
3224
VOICE RECOGNITION
(if equipped)
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the steering
wheel remote controller Say a command
If voice recognition is in [Normal
Mode], then the system will say
“Please say a command. Beep~”
If voice recognition is in [Expert
Mode], then the system will only
say a “Beep~”
To change the Normal Mode/Expert
Mode setting, go to
[System] [Prompt Feedback]/[Voice
Recognition System].
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt. or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -“, “asterisk *”,
ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
SETUP
4323
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering wheel remote controller
NOTICE
While using voice command,
pressing a steering wheel remote
control or a different key will end
voice command.
When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
remote controller to end voice
command.
Features of your vehicle
3244
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod
®
, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Ding~
Ding~
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
Phone book
Cancel
Please say a command
Phone book.
Please say the name of the phone book you
want to call.
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Ding~
4325
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
FM2 FMA AM
AMA)
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Features of your vehicle
3264
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Search iPod
®
Moves to the iPod
®
file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4327
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
Features of your vehicle
3284
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
4329
Features of your vehicle
My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Features of your vehicle
3304
SETUP
(for RDS,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
- AM904DMEE, AM914DMEE
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Day], [Phone] and [System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Pop-up Mode]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4331
Features of your vehicle
Scroll Text
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Scroll text]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat-
edly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Song Info]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3324
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Audio Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Virtual Sound
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]
This feature is used to set the Power
Bass, Power Treble and Surround
sound options.
SETUP
Default
SETUP
4333
Features of your vehicle
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent
Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from Off/Low/Mid/High.
Voice Recognition Setting
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Volume Dialogue]
Use the , buttons to adjust
the Volume Dialog.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3344
Clock/Day Setting
Clock Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Clock Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/
Day screen.
Calendar Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Day Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Time Format
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Time Format]
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
SETUP SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
4335
Features of your vehicle
Clock Display
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Clock Display
(Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
Automatic RDS Time
Press the key Select
[Clock/Day] Select [Automatic RDS
Time]
This feature is used to set time auto-
matically by synchronizing with RDS.
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3364
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless
technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
SETUP SETUP
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death.The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible by
law should never be used during
operation of the vehicle.
4337
Features of your vehicle
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING PHONE BOOKS
Only phone books within connect-
ed phones can be downloaded.
Also check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone
book downloads, refer to your
mobile phone user’s manual.
The Phone book for only the con-
nected phone can be downloaded.
Before downloading, check to see
whether your phone supports the
download feature.
Downloading Phone books
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone book
Download]
The Phone book is downloaded from
the mobile phone and the download
progress is displayed.
NOTICE
Up to 1,000 phone book entries
can be copied into car phone book.
Up to 1,000 phone book entries
can be saved for each paired
device.
Upon downloading phone book
data, previously saved phone book
data will be deleted. However,
Phone book entries saved to other
paired phones are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is connected.
NOTICE
The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book
entries every time the phone is
connected. The download time
may differ depending on the num-
ber of saved phone book entries
and the communication state.
• When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book
download feature.
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3384
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on,
you can play music files saved in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device through the audio
system.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust
the outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be sup-
ported in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phones.
4339
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Voice Recognition Mode Setting
(if equipped)
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Voice Recognition
System]
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
Normal and Expert.
1) Normal : When using voice recog-
nition, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) Expert : When using voice recog-
nition, omits some guidance
prompts
NOTICE
Voice Recognition is depend on the
Audio System.
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
Language support by region
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3404
SETUP
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
-AM900DMMG, AM910DMMG,
AM911DMMG, AM901DMGG,
AM910DMEE, AM912DMEE,
AM911DMEE, AM910DMGL,
AM900DMMN, AM910DMMN
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and
[System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4341
Features of your vehicle
Text Scroll
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Text Scroll]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat-
edly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3424
Virtual Sound
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]
This feature is used to set the Power
Bass, Power Treble and Surround
sound options.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent
Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from Off/Low/Mid/High.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
4343
Features of your vehicle
Clock/Calendar Setting
Clock Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to set the Clock/
Calendar screen.
Calendar Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Clock Display
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Display (Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
SETUP SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3444
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless
technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
SETUP SETUP
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death.The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible by
law should never be used during
operation of the vehicle.
4345
Features of your vehicle
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
NOTICE
Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be
copied into car contacts.
Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be
saved for each paired device.
Upon downloading contacts data,
previously saved contacts data
will be deleted. However, contacts
entries saved to other paired
phones are not deleted.
Auto Download (Contacts)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
T
his feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries once
a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
NOTICE
The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
contacts entries and the communi-
cation state.
When downloading a contacts,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3464
Streaming Audio
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]
When Streaming Audio is turned on,
you can play music files saved in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
4347
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
lever is set to R.
The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when set to a
different lever.
SETUP
SETUP
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
Features of your vehicle
3484
APPENDIX
Name Description
12hr 12 Hour
24hr 24 Hour
AST(A.Store) Automatically selects and saves
channels
AMA AM Radio (Auto store)
AUX External Audio mode
Bass Deep sound
Treble High sound
BT Audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
FMA FM Radio (Auto store)
Power Bass This is a sound system feature
that provides live bass.
Power Treble This is a sound system feature
that provides live treble.
Preset Saved radio frequency
RDS Search Radio Data System Search
TA Off Traffic Announcement
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
• Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection . 5-26
• For safe four-wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Auto hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Trailer stability assist (TSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Downhill brake control (DBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Speed limit control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-68
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-84
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system 5-84
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-84
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Don't place foreign objects or materials in the
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5
53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
Check the condition of the tires.
Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in section 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
Be sure that all lights work.
Check all gauges.
Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be proper-
ly belted whenever the vehicle
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts”
in section 3 for more informa-
tion on their proper use.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol, that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Drunk driving is the num-
ber one contributor to the high-
way death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgement.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
drunk.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
WARNING
When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or
exhaust system and cause
fire.
When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possi-
bly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
Driving your vehicle
65
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for
your convenience, provided the igni-
tion switch is not in the ON position.
The light will go off immediately
when the ignition switch is turned on
or go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC posi-
tion, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
KEY POSITIONS
ODMEDR2019 OCM050002
57
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition key
Never turn the ignition switch
to LOCK or ACC while the
vehicle is moving. This would
result in loss of directional
control and braking function,
which could cause an acci-
dent.
The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in P (Park) for the automatic
transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precau-
tions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
Do not place any movable
objects around the driver’s
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the engine
NOTICE - Kick down
mechanism
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
kick down mechanism in the accel-
erator pedal, it prevents you from
driving at full throttle unintention-
ally by making the driver require
increased effort to depress the accel-
erator pedal. However, if you
depress the pedal more than approx-
imately 80%, the vehicle can be at
full throttle and the accelerator
pedal will be easier to depress. This
is not a malfunction but a normal
condition.
Starting the gasoline engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake, accelerator pedal.
59
Driving your vehicle
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-
ed before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N(neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
Then the glow indicator light will
illuminate.
4.If the glow indicator light goes out,
turn the ignition switch to the
START position and hold it there
until the engine starts (a maximum
of 10 seconds), then release the
key.
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is com-
pleted, turn the ignition key once
more to the LOCK position for 10
seconds, and then to the ON posi-
tion, in order to preheat again.
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1.Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the tur-
bocharger unit.
2.After high speed or extended driv-
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
run the engine on idle condition
about 1 minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine imme-
diately after it has been subject-
ed to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbo charger unit.
W-60
Glow indicator light
Driving your vehicle
105
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated engine start/stop
button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the engine start/stop button will illu-
minate for your convenience. The
light will go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed. It will
also go off immediately when the
theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button posi-
tion
OFF
With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the engine start/stop but-
ton with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position. When you press the engine
start/stop button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft
steering column lock
The steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft.
It locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked
properly when you open the driver's
door, the warning chime will sound.
Try locking the steering wheel again.
If the problem is not solved, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop
button is in the OFF position after the
driver's door is opened, the steering
wheel will not lock and the warning
chime will sound. In such a situation,
close the door. Then the steering
wheel will lock and the warning
chime will stop.
White
ODM052006
511
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop but-
ton will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
NOTICE
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion.
ACC(Accessory)
With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and
electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position for more than 1
hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
Orange
CAUTION
In an emergency situation while
the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and
to the ACC position by pressing
the engine start/stop button for
more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
Driving your vehicle
125
ON
With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the engine start/stop button in
the ON position for a long time. The
battery may discharge, because the
engine is not running.
START/RUN
With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the engine
start/stop button with the shift lever in
the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. For your safety, start the engine
with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop
button without depressing the brake
pedal for automatic transaxle vehi-
cles, the engine will not start and the
engine start/stop button changes as
follow:
OFF
ACC
ON
OFF or ACC
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop
button in the ACC or ON position
for a long time, the battery will dis-
charge.
Not illuminated
Blue
513
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
NOTICE - Kick down
mechanism
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
kick down mechanism in the accel-
erator pedal, it prevents you from
driving at full throttle unintention-
ally by making the driver require
increased effort to depress the accel-
erator pedal. However, if you
depress the pedal more than approx-
imately 80%, the vehicle can be at
full throttle and the accelerator
pedal will be easier to depress. This
is not a malfunction but a normal
condition.
WARNING
Never press the engine
start/stop button while the
vehicle is in motion. This
would result in loss of direc-
tional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver's seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in P (Park), set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precau-
tions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never reach for the engine
start/ stop button or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in the area could
cause loss of vehicle control,
an accident and serious bodi-
ly injury or death.
Do not place any movable
objects around the driver's
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
145
Starting the gasoline engine
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4.Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-
ed before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
4.Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the illuminated glow
indicator goes off. (approximately 5
seconds)
5.The engine starts running when
the glow indicator goes off.
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is
pressed once more while the engine
is pre-heating, the engine may start.
W-60
Glow indicator light
515
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1.Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for sever-
al seconds before sufficient lubri-
cation is ensured in the tur-
bocharger unit.
2.After high speed or extended driv-
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute
before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
When the engine start/stop button
is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system
checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the
” indicator and a message
“Key not in vehicle” will appear on
the instrument cluster and LCD
display. And if all doors are closed,
the chime will sound for 5 seconds.
The indicator or warning will turn
off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any per-
son who is unfamiliar with the
vehicle touch the engine
start/stop button or related
parts.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off imme-
diately after it has been subject-
ed to a heavy load. Doing so
may cause severe damage to
the engine or turbocharger unit.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions per-
mit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the engine start/stop but-
ton in an attempt to restart the
engine.
Driving your vehicle
165
NOTICE
If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly. When
you press the engine start/stop
button directly with the smart key,
the smart key should contact the
button at a right angle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you cannot start the engine nor-
mally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/ stop button for 10 seconds
while it is in the ACC position. The
engine can start without depress-
ing the brake pedal. But for your
safety always depress the brake
pedal before starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the engine
start/stop button for more than
10 seconds except when the
stop lamp fuse is blown.
ODM053007L
517
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic
transaxle has 6 forward speeds and
one reverse speed. The individual
speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
ODM052011
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the knob when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the knob when shifting.
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
Driving your vehicle
185
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever posi-
tion when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the front wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position; then set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate
the engine in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
When stopped on an upgrade,
do not hold the vehicle sta-
tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Do not shift from N (Neutral)
or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position and set the
parking brake fully.
Never leave a child unattend-
ed in a vehicle.
519
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator pedal fully
(more than 80%) until the kick down
mechanism works with a clicking
noise, at which time the transaxle will
automatically downshift to the next
lower gear.
NOTICE
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
A clicking noise heard from the
kick down mechanism by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal fully is a
normal condition.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle”, in this
manual.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while
the vehicle is in motion.
Driving your vehicle
205
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
NOTICE
In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P
(Park) position as required.
In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
(Continued)
ODM052013
S
S
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
s
s
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
521
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
225
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into R (Reverse) position with
the brake pedal depressed, continue
depressing the brake, then do the fol-
lowing:
Type A
1.Press the shift-lock release button.
2.Move the shift lever.
3.We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Type B
1.Carefully remove the cap (1) cover-
ing the shift-lock override access
hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
ODM052012
ODM053014
Type A
Type B
523
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the vehicle in gear when moving.
Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
Always buckle-up! In a colli-
sion, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
Never exceed posted speed
limits.
Driving your vehicle
245
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
525
Driving your vehicle
Engine power can be delivered to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. 4WD is useful when extra
traction is required, such as, when
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or
snow-covered roads. These vehicles
are not designed for challenging off-
road use. Occasional off-road use
such as established unpaved roads
and trails are OK. It is always impor-
tant when traveling off-highway that
the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those
conditions. In general, off-road con-
ditions provide less traction and
braking effectiveness than normal
road conditions. The driver must be
especially alert to avoid driving on
slopes which tilt the vehicle to either
side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the dri-
ver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and his or her passen-
gers.
Tight corner brake effect
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of four-wheel drive
vehicles caused by the difference in
tire rotation at the four wheels and
the zero-degree alignment of the
front wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Off road
driving
This vehicle is designed prima-
rily for on road use although it
can operate effectively off road.
However, it was not designed to
drive in challenging off-road
conditions. Driving in condi-
tions that exceed the vehicle's
intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
CAUTION - 4WD
When turning sharply on a
paved road at low speed while
in four-wheel drive, steering
control will be difficult.
WARNING
If the 4WD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates
that there is a malfunction in the
4WD system.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving your vehicle
265
This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to 4WD AUTO mode
at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into 4WD LOCK mode again.
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
NOTICE
When driving on normal roads, deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button (the indi-
cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with 4WD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated.
Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
When driving in 4WD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the 4WD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
4WD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
527
Driving your vehicle
For safe four-wheel drive oper-
ation
Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehi-
cle.
When you are driving up or down
hills drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution in going up or
down steep hills, since you may flip
your vehicle over depending on the
grade, terrain and water/mud con-
ditions.
WARNING - Four-wheel
driving
The conditions of on-road or
off-road that demand four-
wheel drive mean all functions
of your vehicle are exposed to
extreme stress than under nor-
mal road conditions. Slow down
and be ready for changes in the
composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you
have any doubt about the safety
of the conditions you are fac-
ing, stop and consider the best
way to proceed. Do not exceed
the ability of yourself or your
vehicle to operate safely.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of
steep hills can be extremely
dangerous. This danger can
come from slight changes in the
wheel angle which can destabi-
lize the vehicle or, even if the
vehicle is maintaining stability
under power, it can lose that
stability if the vehicle stops its
forward motion. Your vehicle
may roll over without warning
and without time for you to cor-
rect a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
HILL1 HILL2
Driving your vehicle
285
You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in a
4WD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional 2WD
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in 4WD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in
4WD.
Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving off-
road.
Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
If you need to drive in the water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the 4WD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground.You
could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind,
the vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity and requires
you to drive more slowly.
ODMEDR2146
WARNING - 4WD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners.The center of gravity of
4WD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional 2WD vehi-
cles, making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
529
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehi-
cle.
Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water. Press
the brake pedal several times as
you move slowly until you feel nor-
mal braking forces return.
Shorten your scheduled mainte-
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in section
7). Always wash your vehicle thor-
oughly after off road use, especial-
ly cleaning the bottom of the vehi-
cle.
Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the per-
formance of the 4WD vehicle is
greatly affected by the condition of
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehi-
cle with four tires of the same size
and type.
A full time four wheel drive vehi-
cle cannot be towed by an ordi-
nary tow truck. Make sure that
the vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
WARNING - 4WD driving
Avoid high cornering speed.
Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at high speed.
In a collision, an unbelted per-
son is significantly more like-
ly to die compared to a person
wearing a seat belt.
Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to re-enter the
roadway. In the event your
vehicle leaves the roadway, do
not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
WARNING - Driving
through
water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compart-
ment and wet the ignition sys-
tem, causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop. If this happens
and your vehicle is in a tilted
position, your vehicle may roll
over.
Driving your vehicle
305
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactori-
ly in off-road conditions. Due to this
risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a
rollover. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers, do not
load your roof rack with heavy cargo,
and never modify your vehicle in any
way.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow,
etc. the vehicle can sometimes
be driven out by depressing the
accelerator pedal further; how-
ever avoid running the engine
continuously at high rpm
because doing so could dam-
age the 4WD system.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
Specific design characteris-
tics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
A SUV is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelt-
ed person is significantly
more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
531
Driving your vehicle
Full-time 4WD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake
while performing these tests.
A full-time 4WD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
WARNING - Jacked
vehicle
While a full-time 4WD vehicle is
being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the
tires to rotate.
There is a danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to fall off the
jack and to jump forward or
rearward.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
ing, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
Driving your vehicle
325
1.Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2.Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3.Release the parking brake.
4.Place the rear wheels on the tem-
porary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING
- Dynamometer testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. This
is very dangerous as the vehi-
cle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
ONCEDR3147
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
CAUTION
When lifting up the vehicle, do
not operate front and rear
wheel separately. All four
wheels should be operated.
If you need to operate the
front wheel and rear wheel
when lifting up the vehicle,
you should release the park-
ing brake.
533
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
To dry the brakes, apply them
lightly while maintaining a
safe forward speed until brake
performance returns to nor-
mal.
Always, confirm the position
of the brake and accelerator
pedal before driving. If you
don't check the position of the
accelerator and brake pedal
before driving, you may
depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Brakes
Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to sefely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
345
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs serv-
ice. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
To avoid costly brake repairs,
do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads.
Always replace the front or
rear brake pads as pairs.
535
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a
incline, the shift lever should be in
the P (Park) position on automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
Foot type
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor
wear.
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emer-
gency situation. It could dam-
age the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
OCM050015
OCM050016
Driving your vehicle
365
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may
be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is neces-
sary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
WARNING
To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely
positioned in P (Park) for
automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
WK-23
537
Driving your vehicle
Electric parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1.Depress the brake pedal.
2.Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you keep pressing the EPB switch
till the engine is turned off, the EPB
will not be applied.
NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer if the vehicle does not stand
still, do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more
than 3 seconds.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
ODMEDR2113
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation. It could damage the
vehicle system and endanger
driving safety.
ODM052018
Driving your vehicle
385
To release EPB (electric parking
brake) automatically:
Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and tailgate/trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R
(Rear), D (Drive) or Sports
mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
NOTICE
For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the ignition
switch or engine stop/start button
is in the OFF position, but you
cannot release it.
For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
539
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
The EPB is overheated
Requested by other systems
NOTICE
If the driver turns the engine off by
mistake while Auto Hold is operat-
ing, EPB will be automatically
applied. (Vehicles equipped with
Auto Hold)
System warning
If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but doesn't release auto-
matically, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood (when
the gear is in D [Drive] position or
R [Reverse] position) or
tailgate/trunk (when the gear is in
D [Drive] position or R [Reverse]
position) is opened, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
CAUTION
If the parking brake warning
light is still on even though
the EPB has been released,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and
brake rotor wear.
ODMEDR2126/ODMEDR2129
Driving your vehicle
405
If the above situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
System warning
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
WARNING
To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake and make sure the shift
lever is securely positioned in
P (Park).
Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the car which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
CAUTION
A click sound may be heard
while operating or releasing
the EPB, but these conditions
are normal and indicate that
the EPB is functioning proper-
ly.
When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her
how to operate the EPB.
The EPB may malfunction if
you drive with the EPB
applied.
When you automatically
release EPB by depressing
the accelerator pedal, depress
it slowly.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when
the above message appears for
the Auto Hold and EPB may not
activate.
ODMEDR2127/ODMEDR2130
541
Driving your vehicle
System warning
If the EPB is applied while Auto
Hold is activated because of ESC
(Electronic Stability Program) sig-
nal, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
If the driver’s door is opened and
the seatbelt is not fastened while
Auto Hold is opened, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
ODMEDR2128/ODMEDR2131
ODMEDR2140
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
425
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
CAUTION
The EPB warning light may
illuminate if the EPB switch
operates abnormally. Shut the
engine off and turn it on again
after a few minutes. The warn-
ing light will go off and the
EPB switch will operate nor-
mally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, we
recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If the parking brake warning
light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB
is not applied.
If the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB
warning light is on, press the
switch, then pull it up. Once
more press it back to its origi-
nal position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does
not go off, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a
noise or burning smell when the
EPB is used for emergency
braking, we recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
543
Driving your vehicle
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) does not release
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by
loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow
truck and have the system checked.
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
Set up
1.With the driver's door, engine hood
and tailgate/trunk closed, fasten
the driver's seat belt or depress the
brake pedal and then press the
Auto Hold button. The white AUTO
HOLD indicator will come on and
the system will be in the standby
position.
ODM052019
W
W
h
h
i
i
t
t
e
e
Driving your vehicle
445
2.When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from white to green.
3.The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or sports mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green to
white.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
WARNING
When driving off from Auto
Hold by depressing the acceler-
ator pedal, always check the
surrounding area near your
vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth launch.
ODM052021
L
L
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
o
o
f
f
f
f
ODM052020
W
W
h
h
i
i
t
t
e
e
G
G
r
r
e
e
e
e
n
n
545
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened when
the gear is in D [Drive]
- The tailgate/trunk is opened
when the gear is in R [Reverse]
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB in
such cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened when
the gear is in D [Drive]
- The tailgate/trunk is opened
when the gear is in R [Reverse]
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. We recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
While operating Auto Hold, you
may hear mechanical noise.
However, it is normal operating
noise.
WARNING
Press the accelerator pedal
slowly when you start the
vehicle.
For your safety, cancel the
Auto Hold when you drive
downhill or back up the vehi-
cle or park the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
465
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
CAUTION
If there is a malfunction with the
driver’s door, engine hood or
tailgate/ trunk open detection
system, the Auto Hold may not
work properly.
We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent
accidents due to improper or
dangerous driving maneuvers.
Even though vehicle control is
improved during emergency
braking, always maintain a safe
distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced dur-
ing extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock brak-
ing system (or Electronic
Stability Control System) may
be longer than for those without
it in the following road condi-
tions.
During these conditions the
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
The safety features of an ABS
(or ESC) equipped vehicle
should not be tested by high
speed driving or cornering.This
could endanger the safety of
yourself or others.
547
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation warrants and allow
the ABS to control the force being
delivered to the brakes.
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
CAUTION
If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
The ABS warning light will
stay on for approximately 3
seconds after the ignition
switch is ON. During that time,
the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal.
(Continued)
W-78
Driving your vehicle
485
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunc-
tioning.
Do not pump your brakes!
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
(Continued)
If the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your
ABS. We recommend that you
contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer .
CAUTION
When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an
icy road, and operate your
brakes continuously, the ABS
will be active continuously
and the ABS warning light
may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS. We rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
549
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control
(ESC) (if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going.
ESC applies the brakes at individual
wheels and intervenes with engine
management system to stabilize the
vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) System is
functioning properly.
ODM052046
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. Electronic stability
control (ESC) will not prevent
accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious acci-
dents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by
avoiding maneuvers that cause
the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precau-
tions for driving - including driv-
ing at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
Driving your vehicle
505
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate
for approximately 3 sec-
onds, then ESC is turned
on.
Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, ESC indicator light
blinks.
When the Electronic
Stability Control is operating
properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect of
brake control and indicates
nothing unusual.
When moving out of the
mud or slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolution per
minute) may not increase
even if you press the
accelerator pedal deeply.
This is to maintain the sta-
bility and traction of the
vehicle and does not indi-
cate a problem.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control
function does not operate. It
means the traction control
function does not operate.
Brake control function only
operates.
-
551
Driving your vehicle
ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime
will sound. At this state, the
engine control function and
brake control function do not
operate. It means the car sta-
bility control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the
button.
ESC indicator light
ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved,
snowy, or icy roads. Drive slow-
ly and don’t attempt to acceler-
ate whenever the ESC indicator
light is blinking, or when the
road surface is slippery.
Driving your vehicle
525
ESC OFF usage
When driving
ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
NOTICE
When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detected changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is operating:
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
( ) light will blink.
• The steering wheel may be con-
trolled.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle.
This is only the effect of brake control
and indicates nothing unusual.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
553
Driving your vehicle
The VSM does not operate when:
Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
Driving rearward
ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument
cluster
EPS (Electronic Power Steering)
indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
EPS (Electronic Power Steering)
system or VSM system. If the ESC
indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, we recommend that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9
mph) on curves.
The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
WARNING
The Vehicle Stability
Management system is not a
substitute for safe driving
practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. Always hold the steer-
ing wheel firmly while driving.
Your vehicle is designed to
activate according to the dri-
ver’s intention, even with the
VSM installed. Always follow
all the normal precautions for
driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving
in inclement weather and on a
slippery road.
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the
VSM system to malfunction.
When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
Driving your vehicle
545
Trailer stability assist (TSA)
(if equipped)
Trailer stability assist is operated as
vehicle stability control system.
Trailer stability assist system has an
effort to stabilize the vehicle and trail-
er when the trailer sways or oscil-
lates. There are various reasons
making vehicle sway and oscillate.
Almost case it happens at high
speed however, if the trailer is affect-
ed by crosswinds, buffeting, and
improper overloading, it may be a
risk of swaying.
Factors of swaying such as:
- High speed
- Strong crosswinds
- Improper overloading
- Sudden controlling of steering
wheel
- Uneven road
Trailer stability assist system contin-
uously analyzes the vehicle and trail-
er instability. When the Trailer stabili-
ty assist system detects some sway,
the brakes are applied automatically
to stabilize the vehicle on the front
wheel. However, if it is not enough to
stabilize, the brakes are applied on
all wheels automatically and engine
power is properly reduced. When the
vehicle is stable from swaying, trailer
stability assist system does not oper-
ate.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from slipping back by operat-
ing the brakes automatically for
about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or after about 2 sec-
onds.
NOTICE
The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for
about 2 seconds, so when the
vehicle is starting off always
depress the accelerator pedal.
555
Driving your vehicle
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking
the stop light when the vehicle is
braked rapidly and severely.
The system is activated when:
The vehicle suddenly stops (vehi-
cle speed is over 55km/h and the
vehicle deceleration at greater
than 7 m/s
2
)
The ABS is activating
When the vehicle speed is under 40
km/h and the ABS deactivates or the
sudden stop situation is over, the
stop light blinking will stop. Instead,
the hazard warning flasher will turn
on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn
off when vehicle speed is over
10km/h after the vehicle has
stopped. Also, it will turn off when the
vehicle is driven at low speed for
some time. You can turn it off manu-
ally by pushing the hazard warning
flasher switch.
Downhill brake control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The actual feature in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
supports the driver come down a
steep hill without the driver depress-
ing the brake pedal. It slows down
the vehicle under 10 km/h (6.3 mph)
and lets the driver concentrate on
steering the vehicle.
DBC defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition is turned on.
The DBC can be turned on or off by
pushing the button.
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal
(ESS) system will not work if the
hazard warning flasher is
already on.
ODM052047
Driving your vehicle
565
NOTICE
The DBC does not turn ON in the
P (Park) position.
The DBC may not activate if the
ESC (or BAS) is activated.
Noise or vibration may occur from
the brakes when the DBC is acti-
vated.
The rear stop light comes on when
the DBC is activated.
On a very steep hill even though
the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal is depressed the DBC may
not deactivate.
Always turn OFF the DBC on nor-
mal roads. The DBC might acti-
vate from the standby mode dur-
ing abrupt corning or driving over
speed bumps.
WARNING
If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates, the system has over-
heated or there is an operational problem. The DBC will not activate.
If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates even though the DBC sys-
tem has been cooled, we recommend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Mode
Indicator
light
Description
Standby
Green light
illuminated
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
40 km/h (25 mph). The DBC system will turn ON and enter the
standby mode.
The system maintains the standby mode when vehicle speed is
under 60km/h.
Activated
Green light
blink
In the standby mode, DBC will activate automatically under
the following conditions:
The incline is over a certain degree.
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is not depressed.
OFF
Green light
OFF
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
The DBC button is pressed again.
The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (38 mph).
Temporarily
deactivated
Green light
illuminated
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate
under the following conditions:
The hill is not steep enough.
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically
activate again.
557
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park-
ing brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and we rec-
ommend that you call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assis-
tance.
• Do not coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
Do not "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because it can result in the
brakes overheating and losing their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, do not let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
WARNING
Whenever you leave or park
your vehicle, always set the
parking brake as far as possi-
ble and fully engage the vehi-
cle's transaxle into the P
(Park) position. If the parking
brake is not fully engaged, the
vehicle may move inadver-
tently and injure yourself and
others.
All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
585
Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-
cle is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required
by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
559
Driving your vehicle
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illumi-
nated), the cruise control can
be switched on accidentally.
Keep the cruise control sys-
tem off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise
control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
Use the cruise control system
only when driving on open
highways in good weather.
Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
covered) or winding roads or
over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control sys-
tem.
Be careful when driving
downhill using the cruise con-
trol system, which may
increase the vehicle speed.
ODMEDR2010
Driving your vehicle
605
NOTICE
During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
Cruise control switch
/ CRUISE : Turns cruise control
system on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the /CRUISE button on
the steering wheel, to turn the sys-
tem on. The CRUISE indicator light
will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph).
ODMEDR2001 ODMEDR2002
561
Driving your vehicle
3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed.The
SET indicator light will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately.The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately.The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
ODMEDR2004 ODMEDR2003
ODMEDR2003
Driving your vehicle
625
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
Depress the brake pedal.
Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
Press the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 20
km/h (12 mph).
Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the
SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel.You will return to your
previously preset speed.
ODMEDR2005
563
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40
km/h (25 mph):
If any method other than the /
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
Press the /CRUISE button. (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off)
Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
ODMEDR2002
ODMEDR2004
Driving your vehicle
645
You can set the speed limit when you
do not want to drive over a specific
speed.
If you drive over the preset speed
limit, the warning system operates
(set speed limit will blink and chime
will sound) until the vehicle speed
returns within the speed limit.
NOTICE
While speed limit control is in oper-
ation, the cruise control system can-
not be activated.
Speed limit control switch
: Turns speed limit control system
on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels set speed limit.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed
limit control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit
control speed.
To set speed limit :
1.Press the speed limit button on
the steering wheel, to turn the sys-
tem on.
The speed limit indicator light will illu-
minate.
SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ODMEDR2006
ODMEDR2012
Type A
Type B
ODMEDR2007
565
Driving your vehicle
2.Move the lever down (to SET-).
3.Move the lever up (to RES+) or
down (to SET-), and release it at
the desired speed. Move the lever
up (to RES+) or down (to SET-)
and hold it. The speed will increase
or decrease by 5 km/h (3 mph).
The set speed limit will be displayed. To drive over the preset speed limit
you must depress hard on the accel-
erator pedal (more than approxi-
mately 80%) until the kick down
mechanism works with a clicking
noise. Then the set speed limit will
blink and chime will sound until you
return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
ODMEDR2008 ODMEDR2013 ODMEDR2014
Type A
Type B
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
665
NOTICE
Depressing the accelerator pedal
less than approximately 50%, the
vehicle will not speed over the pre-
set speed limit but maintain the
vehicle speed within the speed
limit.
A clicking noise heard from the
kick down mechanism by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal fully is a
normal condition.
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
Press the speed limit button
once again.
Press the cruise switch (If you
press cruise switch, the cruise sys-
tem will turn on)
If you press the CANCEL switch
once, the set speed limit will cancel,
but it will not turn the system off. If
you wish to reset the speed limit,
move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(to SET-) to the desired speed.
ODMEDR2009
ODMEDR2005
567
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
The "---" indicator will blink if
there is a problem with speed
limit control system.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ODMEDR205
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
685
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windshield and
warns you when your vehicle leaves
the lane.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the
driver's responsibility to
always check the road condi-
tions.
Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly, when the LDWS
warns you that your vehicle is
leaving the lane.
If the sensor can not detect
the lane or if the vehicle speed
does not exceed 60km/h, the
LDWS won't warn you even
though vehicle leaves the
lane.
If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating and
accessory on the front wind-
shield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not let water or any kind of
liquid come in contact with
the LDWS sensor.
Do not remove the LDWS
parts and do not affect the
sensor by a strong impact.
Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
Always check the road condi-
tions because you may not
hear the warning chime
because of audio, and exter-
nal conditions.
ONCDCO3052
ODM052048
569
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator illu-
minates on the cluster. To cancel the
LDWS, press the button again.
The color of symbol will change
depend on the condition of LDWS.
- White color : It means the sensor
does not detect the
lane line.
- Green color : It means the sensor
detects the lane line.
If your vehicle leaves the lane when
the LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 60km/h, the warning
operates as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low with 0.8 seconds of interval.
ONC053002
ONC053003
ONC053004
ONC053005
When the sensor detects the lane line Left lane departure warning
When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line Right lane departure warning
ONC053001
Driving your vehicle
705
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates with 0.8 seconds of
interval.
Warning indicator
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator
(yellow) comes on, the LDWS is not
working properly. If this occurs, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
The driver turns on the turn signal
to change lane.
But, when the hazard warning
flasher is operating, the LDWS
operates normally.
Operating the wiper switch with HI
mode due to heavy rain.
Driving on the lane line.
NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn sig-
nal switch then change the lane.
ODMEDR2011
ONC053001
571
Driving your vehicle
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
The lane can't be visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or many
other things.
The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
Not turning on the headlight even
at night or in the tunnel, or light is
weak.
Difficult to distinguish the color of
the lane from the road.
Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
Such as street light, sunlight or
oncoming vehicle light reflects
from the water on the road.
The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to a direct ray of light.
The lane is very wide or narrow.
The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
There is a boundary structure.
The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
The vehicle shakes heavily.
The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing complicatedly.
Putting something on the dash-
board.
Driving with the sun in front of you.
Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right).
Driving your vehicle
725
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-
ciency by controlling certain engine
and transaxle system operating
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit and road
condition.
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the engine is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated :
The engine noise may get louder.
The vehicle speed may slightly be
reduced.
The air conditioner performance
may be affected.
Limitation of Active ECO oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
When using sports mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
(Gasoline engine only)
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM
ODM052050
573
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many kilometers (miles) you can get
from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To oper-
ate your vehicle as economically as
possible, use the following driving
suggestions to help save money in
both fuel and repairs:
Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Do not make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Do not race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you do not have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
Do not "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
Travel lightly. Do not carry unnec-
essary weight in your vehicle.
Weight reduces fuel economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
745
Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the
engine. Lugging is driving too
slowly in too high a gear resulting
engine bucking. If this happens,
shift to a lower gear. Over-revving
is racing the engine beyond its safe
limit. This can be avoided by shift-
ing at the recommended speeds.
Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, we rec-
ommend that the system be serviced
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. Instead,
keep the engine on and down-
shift to an appropriate gear for
engine braking effect. In addi-
tion, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock (if
equipped) resulting in loss of
vehicle steering which could
cause serious injury or death.
575
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
Avoid sudden braking or steering.
When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them
capable of performing in a wide vari-
ety of road applications. Specific
design characteristics give them a
higher center of gravity than ordinary
vehicles. An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better view of
the road, which allows you to antici-
pate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and
passengers are strongly recom-
mended to buckle their seat belts. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. There are steps
that a driver can make to reduce the
risk of a rollover. If at all possible,
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers, do not load your roof rack with
heavy cargo, and never modify your
vehicle in any way.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on
a vehicle equipped with ABS.
Driving your vehicle
765
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift any forward
gear in vehicles equipped with an
automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little
as possible. If you are still stuck after
a few tries, have the vehicle pulled
out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine
overheating and possible damage to
the transaxle.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
ing, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
Specific design characteris-
tics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
A SUV is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelt-
ed person is significantly
more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
577
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
WARNING - Spinning
tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
OUN056051
Driving your vehicle
785
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
1VQA3003OCM053010
579
Driving your vehicle
If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks of
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the
tires.
1VQA1004
Driving your vehicle
805
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and
sudden tire failure leading to
accidents, injuries, and even
death. Always check the tires
for proper inflation before
driving. For proper tire pres-
sures, refer to section 8,
“Tires and wheels”.
Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
ous. Worn-out tires can result
in loss of vehicle control, col-
lisions, injury, and even death.
Worn-out tires should be
replaced as soon as possible
and should never be used for
driving. Always check the tire
tread before driving your vehi-
cle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to sec-
tion 7, “Tires and wheels”.
581
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front and your vehicle. Also, apply
the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids.
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all coun-
tries. Check the country laws before
fitting tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
1VQA3005
Driving your vehicle
825
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them
to the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
4WD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for an 4WD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
CAUTION
Make sure the snow chains
are the correct size and type
for your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to
the vehicle body and suspen-
sion and may not be covered
by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting
vehicle components causing
the snow chains to come
loose from the tire. Make sure
the snow chains are SAE
class “S” certified.
Always check chain installa-
tion for proper mounting after
driving approximately 0.5 to 1
km (0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensure
safe mounting. Retighten or
remount the chains if they are
loose.
1VQA3007
583
Driving your vehicle
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. We recommend that the
level of charge in your battery be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire chains
The use of chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling.
Do not exceed 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufactur-
er’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
WARNING - Mounting
chains
When mounting snow chains,
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers
and place a triangular emer-
gency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always
place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
Driving your vehicle
845
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the shift lever in P
(automatic transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
585
Driving your vehicle
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, shovel, jumper cables, window
scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-
alls, blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine com-
partment
Placement of foreign objects or
materials which prevent cooling of
the engine, in the engine compart-
ment, may cause a failure or com-
bustion. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
Driving your vehicle
865
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. We
recommend that you ask an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE - For Europe
The technically permissible maxi-
mum load on the rear axle(s) may
be exceeded by not more than 15
% and the technically permissible
maximum laden mass of the vehi-
cle may be exceeded by not more
than 10 % or 100 kg (220.4 lbs),
whichever value is lower. In this
case, do not exceed 100 km/h (62.1
mph) for vehicle of category M1 or
80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehicle of
category N1.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When towing a trailer, the addi-
tional load imposed at the trailer
coupling device may cause the
rear tire maximum load ratings to
be exceeded, but not by more than
15%. In such a case, do not exceed
100km/h, and the rear tire pres-
sure should be at least 20 kPa(0.2
bar) above the tire pressure(s) as
recommended for normal use (i.e.
without a trailer attached).
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in
this section.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improp-
erly, you can lose control when
you pull a trailer. For example, if
the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well - or
even at all. You and your pas-
sengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only
if you have followed all the
steps in this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight ) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
587
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also considerably adds
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
NOTICE - Location of trailer
mounting
The mounting hole for hitches are
located on both sides of the under-
body behind the rear tires.
ODMEDR2020
Driving your vehicle
885
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you do not seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessary is
available at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
your country’s regulations and that it
is properly installed and operating
correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instruc-
tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Do not tap into or modify your vehi-
cle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
589
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
vers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
Driving your vehicle
905
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It is important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have an automat-
ic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trail-
er wiring harness could result
in damage to the vehicle electri-
cal system and/or personal
injury.
591
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpected-
ly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here is how to do
it:
1.Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed down hill, left if headed up
hill).
2.If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the car in P (Park).
3.Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4.Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6.Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7.Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the park-
ing brake set.
CAUTION
When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat.
If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves
across the dial towards “130/H
(HOT)”, pull over and stop as
soon as it is safe to do so, and
allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed
once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
You must decide driving
speed depending on trailer
weight and uphill grade to
reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle over-
heating.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached could
cause serious injury or death,
should the trailer break loose or
the brake stops working.
Driving your vehicle
925
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1.With automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2.Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3.Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4.Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it is a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Do not forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
CAUTION
Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur in hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates over-
heating, switch off the air con-
ditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
WARNING - Parking
brake
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the parking
brake is not firmly set.
If you have left the engine run-
ning, the vehicle can move sud-
denly. You or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
593
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trail-
er
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
Consider using a sway control.You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
Do not do any towing with your car
during its first 2,000 km (1,200
miles) in order to allow the engine
to properly break in. Failure to
heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transaxle dam-
age.
When towing a trailer, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer on addition-
al requirements such as a towing
kit, etc.
Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
Engine
Item
Gasoline Engine
(3.3L)
Diesel Engine
(2.2L)
Automatic
transaxle
Automatic
transaxle
Maximum trailer weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
750 (1,653) 750 (1,653)
With brake
System
2,000 (4,409) 2,000 (4,409)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
100 (220) 100 (220)
Recommended distance from rear wheel
center to coupling point
mm (Inch)
1,250 (49)
Driving your vehicle
945
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
595
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Trailer
Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check
weights and loading at a com-
mercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Driving your vehicle
965
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rat-
ing)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight
rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle
weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the certification
label attached to the driver's (or
front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing
the items (and people) before
putting them in the vehicle. Be
careful not to overload your
vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over
slowly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not
start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . 6-8
• Low tire pressure (position) telltale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Wheel nut tightening torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• First aid kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Triangle reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Tire pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
ODM042242
ODM042243
Type A
Type B
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing, set the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position and then push
the vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle does not start, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position, check all con-
nectors at ignition, coil and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The
battery produces hydrogen
gas which may explode if
exposed to flame or sparks.
If these instructions are not
followed exactly, serious per-
sonal injury and damage to
the vehicle may occur! If you
are not sure how to follow this
procedure, seek qualified
assistance. Automobile bat-
teries contain sulfuric acid.
This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump start-
ing, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid
on yourself, your clothing or
on the vehicle.
Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal on the booster
battery (2). Proceed to connect
one end of the other jumper cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other
end to a solid, stationary, metallic
point (for example, the engine lift-
ing bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you will experience a
loss of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park) and
set the parking brake. If the air con-
ditioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is oper-
ating. If the fan is not running, turn
the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and we recommend that you call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the cool-
ing system and we recommend
that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot.This can
allow coolant to blow out of the
opening and cause serious
burns.
What to do in an emergency
86
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
ODMEEM2004/ODMEEM2005
ODM062002
Type A
Type B
69
What to do in an emergency
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator do
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale warning
message will indicate which tire is
significantly under-inflated by illumi-
nating the corresponding position
light.
If either telltale or LCD warning mes-
sage displays immediately reduce
your speed, avoid hard cornering
and anticipate increased stopping
distances.You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with a spare tire.
ODMEEM2004/ODMEEM2005
Type A Type B
What to do in an emergency
106
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire and drive for
about 10 minutes at the speed above
25 km/h, one of the following will
happen:
The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel. (changed tire
equipped with a sensor not in the
vehicle)
The TPMS malfunction indicator
will remain continuously illuminat-
ed while driving because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel. (changed tire
equipped with a sensor in the vehi-
cle)
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
611
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to determine the cause of the
problem.
NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure position
telltale will not be displayed even
though the vehicle has an under-
inflated tire.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at the speed above 25 km/h
after replacing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, one of the follow-
ing will happen:
The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel. (changed tire
equipped with a sensor not in the
vehicle)
The TPMS malfunction indicator
will remain continuously illuminat-
ed while driving because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel. (changed tire
equipped with a sensor in the vehi-
cle)
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
What to do in an emergency
126
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - TPMS
The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI if
your vehicle is equipped with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during
below period must be
equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-
cle registrations)
613
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
ONCDEM2003
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
146
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Find the plastic hex bolt cover and
remove the cover with coin or flat -
blade screwdriver.
3.Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower the
spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
ONCDEM2001
(Continued)
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
ONCNEM2002
615
What to do in an emergency
4.After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth-
erwise the spare tire carrier may be
damaged.
5.Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire.
To store the spare tire:
1.Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2.Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3.Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
ODM062007ODM062006
WARNING
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
What to do in an emergency
166
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
WARNING -
Changing a
tire
To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1VQA4022
1VQA4023
617
What to do in an emergency
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7.Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack at
the designated locations under the
frame. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with two
tabs and a raised dot to index with
the jack.
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
ONCDEM2011 ONCDEM2004 ONCDEM2012
What to do in an emergency
186
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the
wheel on the hub, pick up the
spare tire, line up the holes with
the studs and slide the wheel onto
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the
wheel lined up with the top stud.
Then jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can be slid
over the other studs.
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight.The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
619
What to do in an emergency
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle.
Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
ODM062011
What to do in an emergency
206
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
CAUTION
You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
621
What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
Do not use more than one tempo-
rary spare tire at a time.
Do not tow a trailer while the tem-
porary spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
226
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
OHYK064001
OHYK064002
• Type A
Example
• Type B
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
623
What to do in an emergency
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
JACKDOC14S
What to do in an emergency
246
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in sec-
tion 5.
On 4WD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OXM069028
dolly
dolly
CAUTION
The 4WD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
4WD system.
WARNING - if equipped
with rollover
sensor
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to OFF or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignition is
ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
625
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1.Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OUN046030
OCM054034
ONCDEM2005
ONCNEM2006
Front
Rear
What to do in an emergency
266
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speed.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Do not use the towing hooks to pull
a vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
ONCDEM2007
ONCNEM2008
Front
Rear
627
What to do in an emergency
Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing
hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing
cable or chain may break and
cause serious injury or dam-
age.
If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
We recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
OXM069009
CAUTION
Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
What to do in an emergency
286
Emergency towing precautions
Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
If the car is being towed with
all four wheels on the ground,
it can be towed only from the
front. Be sure that the
transaxle is in neutral. Be sure
the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in
the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle
to operate the steering and
brakes.
To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than
1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.
Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transaxle fluid is leak-
ing, flatbed equipment or a
towing dolly must be used.
629
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency com-
modities in the vehicle to help you
respond to the emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, take
the following steps carefully.
1.Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2.Aim the nozzle toward the base of
the fire.
3.Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze the
handle to discharge the extinguish-
er. If you release the handle, the
discharge will stop.
4.Sweep the nozzle back and forth at
the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch it careful-
ly since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scis-
sors, bandage and adhesive tape
and etc. in the kit to give first aid to
an injured person.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-
ing emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to any problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-
to-day use, and you may have to add
a few pounds of air periodically and it
is not usually a sign of a leaking tire,
but of normal wear. Always check tire
pressure when the tires are cold
because tire pressure increases with
temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps;
1.Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the tire.
2.Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will escape
as you begin and more will escape
if you don't press the gauge in firm-
ly.
3.A firm non-leaking push will acti-
vate the gauge.
4.Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to know whether the tire
pressure is low or high.
5.Adjust the tire pressures to the
specified pressure. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
6.Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Engine compartment precautions (Diesel engine) . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• Normal maintenance schedule - Gasoline engine. . . 7-10
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions
- Gasoline engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
• Normal maintenance schedule - Diesel engine
(for europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions
- Diesel engine (for europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
• Normal maintenance schedule - Diesel engine
(except europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions
- Diesel engine (except europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-28
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Fuel filter (for diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Draining water from fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Fuel filter cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Battery capacity label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . 7-51
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
• Headlamp, position lamp, front turn signal lamp,
front fog lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Headlight and front fog light aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-91
• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
• Door courtesy lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
• Interior lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
• Evaporative emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
7
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
11. Fuel filter (if equipped)
ONCEMC3212/ODM012005
Diesel Engine (R2.2)
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Gasoline Engine (Lambda II 3.3L) - MPI
Maintenance
47
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
We recommend in general that you
have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered when your vehicle is
covered by warranty.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Service Passport pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, we recommend
that the system be seviced by an
authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
75
Maintenance
Engine compartment precau-
tions (Diesel engine)
The piezo injector operates at high
voltage (maximum 200v).
Therefore, the following accidents
may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from
the operating injector may cause
the artificial heart pacemaker to
malfunction.
Follow the safety tips provided
below, when you are checking the
engine room while the engine is
running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
while the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector con-
nector while the engine is run-
ning.
- People using pacemakers must
not go near the engine while the
engine is starting or running.
WARNING -
Maintenance work
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures. If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, we recommend that the
system be servied by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cool-
ing fans.
Maintenance
67
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off
engine. High-pressure pump,
rail, injectors and high-pressure
pipes are subject to high pres-
sure even after the engine
stopped. The fuel jet produced
by fuel leaks may cause serious
injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers
should not move than 30cm
closer to the ECU or wiring har-
ness within the engine room
while engine is running, since
the high currents in the elec-
tronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
77
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed at the frequencies indicated
to help ensure safe, dependable
operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
Check the engine oil level.
Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
Maintenance
87
Check parking brake.
Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
Check headlight alignment.
Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
Clean body and door drain holes.
Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
Check the air conditioning system.
Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
Clean battery and terminals.
Check the brake fluid level.
79
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated
where none of the following condi-
tions apply. If any of the following con-
ditions apply, follow Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions.
Repeated short distance driving.
Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
Extensive use of brakes.
Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
Driving on rough or muddy roads.
Driving in mountainous areas.
Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After the
periods or distance shown in the
chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Drive belts *
1
For Europe I I I I I I
Except Europe I I I I I I I I
Engine oil and engine oil
filter *
2
*
2-1
For Europe R R R R R R R R
Except
Europe
For Middle East - MPI Replace every 10,000 km or 12 months *
3
Except Middle East - MPI Replace every 15,000 km or 12 months
For China - GDI Replace every 5,000 km or 6 months
Fuel additives *
4
For Europe Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Except Europe Add every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Air cleaner filter
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except
Europe
For China, India, Middle
East
Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Except China, India,
Middle East
Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Replace every 45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36 months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2-1
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine,
and such damage is not covered by warranty.
*
3
: Driving in summer season temperature over 40°C (104°F - SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,YEMEN ETC) or driving
over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must conform the severe driving condition.
*
4
: If good quality gasolines that meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive
is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other
additives.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommended that the system should be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*
6
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-
lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommanded that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Spark plugs Replace every 160,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120 months
Valve clearance *
5
I I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I I I
Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)
For Europe I I I I
Except Europe I R I R I R I R
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle
body) (if equipped)
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Fuel filter *
6
For Europe I I I I
Except Europe I R I R I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
For Europe I I I I
Except Europe I I I I I I I I
Cooling system I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Engine coolant *
7
For Europe
At first, replace at 210,000 km or 120 months:
after that, replace every 30,000 km or 24 months *
8
Except Europe
At first, replace every 200,000 km or 120 months:
after that, replace every 40,000 km or 24 months *
8
Battery condition
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
All electrical systems I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Parking brake (Foot type) I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid
For Europe R R R R R R R R
Except Europe I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Steering gear rack, linkage and
boots
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
8
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Front suspension ball joints
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Air conditioner refrigerant
(if equipped)
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Air conditioner compressor
(if equipped)
For Europe I I I I I I I I
Except Europe Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
For Europe R R R R R R R R
Except Europe Replace every 15,000 km or 12 months
Automatic transaxle fluid No check, No service required
Transfer case oil (4WD) *
9
I I I I
Rear differential oil (4WD) *
9
I I I I
Propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
9
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Maintenance
147
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter
For Europe R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Except
Middle East
R Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
For Middle
East (MPI)
R Every 7,500 km (4,500 miles) or 6 months
For China R Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
B, H
Transfer case oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, J
Rear differential oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, J
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - GASOLINE ENGINE
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
715
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Automatic transaxle fluid
For Europe
R
Every 90,000 km
A, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J
Except
Europe
Every 100,000 km
Propeller shaft I
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
C, E
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (FOR EUROPE)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator, pulley and if necessary correct or
replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If
the diesel fuel specifications don’t meet the EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe maintenance schedule.
*
4
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 20,000 km or 12 months.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Drive belts *
1
At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter *
2
*
3
*
4
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter I R I R I R I R
Fuel filler cap I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (FOR EUROPE)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel, “EN590 or equivalent”. If
the diesel fuel specifications don’t meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are some important safety mat-
ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of
maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
6
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Fuel filter cartridge *
5
I R I R I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Cooling system I I I I I I I
Engine coolant *
6
At first, replace at 210,000 km or 120 months:
after that, replace every 30,000 km or 24 months
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
All electrical systems I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
Maintenance
187
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Parking brake (Foot type) I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid R R R R R R R R
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (FOR EUROPE)
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (FOR EUROPE)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R
Automatic transaxle fluid No check, No service required
Transfer case oil (4WD) *
7
I I I I
Rear differential oil (4WD) *
7
I I I I
Propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
207
Engine oil and engine oil filter R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) A, B, C, F, G,
or 12 months H, I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter R C, E
Transfer case oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, K
Rear axle oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I C, D, E, F, G
Automatic transaxle fluid
R
Every 90,000 km
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - DIESEL ENGINE (FOR EUROPE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
721
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving in cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Propeller shaft I Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months C, E
Front suspension ball joints I C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I C, D, E, F
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Maintenance
227
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (EXCEPT EUROPE)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2-1
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can dam-
age the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
I I I I
Engine oil and engine oil filter *
2,
*
2-1
For Russia R R R R R R R R
Except Russia
Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months
Air cleaner filter
For Russia R R R R R R R R
Except Russia
Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Fuel filler cap I I
Vacuum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body)
(if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter cartridge *
3
I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I
Cooling system I I I I I
723
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (EXCEPT EUROPE)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
3
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel, “EN590 or equivalent”. If
the diesel fuel specifications don’t meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "Every
7,500km inspection and every 15,000km replacement”. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surg-
ing, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Maintenance
247
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
4
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Engine coolant *
4
At first, replace every 200,000 km or 120 months:
after that, replace every 40,000 km or 24 months *
5
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
All electrical systems I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Parking brake (Foot type) I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (EXCEPT EUROPE)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
725
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (EXCEPT EUROPE)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R R R R R R R R
Automatic transaxle fluid No check, No service required
Transfer case oil (4WD) *
6
I I
Rear differantail oil (4WD) *
6
I I
Propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*6
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
267
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - DIESEL ENGINE (EXCEPT EUROPE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter
For Russia
R
Every 7,500 km (4,500 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, F, G, H,
I, J, K, L
Except
Russia
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Transfer case oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, K
Rear axle oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Automatic transaxle fluid
Except
Europe
R Every 100,000 km
A, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, K
727
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during
hot weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle
towing
J : Driving in cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Propeller shaft I Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months C, E
Front suspension ball joints I C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I C, D, E, F
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Maintenance
287
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
We recommend that the fuel filter be
replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. We recommend that the fuel lines,
fuel hoses and connectionsr be replaced
by an authoized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off
engine. High pressure pump,
rail, injectors and high pressure
pipes are subject to high pres-
sure even after the engine
stopped. The fuel jet produced
by fuel leaks may cause serious
injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers
should not move than 30cm
closer to the ECU or wiring har-
ness within the engine room
while engine is running, since
the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
729
Maintenance
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner
filter be replaced by an authoized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Spark plugs
(for gasoline engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for gasoline engine)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. We recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
307
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
We recommend that the automatic
transaxle fluid changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the maintenance schedule.
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the EPB actuator, wiring
and connectors.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle mal-
function and failure. Use only
specified automatic transaxle
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended
lubricants and capacities” in
section 8.)
731
Maintenance
Brake pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the HYUNDAI web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evi-
dence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Maintenance
327
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Diesel
engine
Overfilling the engine oil may
cause severe dieseling due to
churning effect. It may lead to
engine damage accompanied
with abrupt engine speed incre-
ment, combustion noise and
white smoke emission.
CAUTION
Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil.
If you drop the engine oil on
the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
ONCEMC3213
OXM079004
Type A
Type B
733
Maintenance
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as pos-
sible after handling used oil.
ONCEMC3215
OXM079005
Type A
Type B
Maintenance
347
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least
once a year, at the beginning of the
winter season, and before traveling
to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
735
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) or soft water.
Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not
overfill.
If frequent additions are required, we
recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Recommended engine coolant
When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
ODM073006
Maintenance
367
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
ODM072007
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure causing serious
injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
737
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination. If the level is low, add fluid to
the MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
NOTICE
Before removing the brake filter
cap, read the warning on the cap.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake fluid
should come in contact with
your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of
fresh tap water. Have your eyes
examined by a doctor as soon
as possible.
WARNING - Loss of
brake fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, we recommend that the
system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
ODM072009
WARNING
Clean filler cap before remov-
ing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4
brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Maintenance
387
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary.
Plain water may be used if washer
fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Coolant
Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
ODMNMC2019
ODM072010
Type A
Type B
739
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,
294N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
OCM050015
Maintenance
407
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays
an important role of separating water
from fuel and accumulating the water
in its bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter,
the warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light turned
on, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Fuel filter cartridge replace-
ment
NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter car-
tridge, we recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ODM072011
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the
fuel filter is not drained at prop-
er times, damages to the major
parts such as the fuel system
can be caused by water perme-
ation in the fuel filter.
741
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
ODM072012
ODM072013 OXM079014
Maintenance
427
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
743
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be care-
ful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the
maintenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap.
2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
ODM072015
ODM072014
Maintenance
447
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case while pressing the lock on
the right of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the fil-
ter may be reduced.
OCM070017ODM072016
745
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
1JBA5122
Maintenance
467
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078059
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
747
Maintenance
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, we recom-
mend that the wiper blade be
replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OHM078062
OHM078063
OHM078060
OHM078061
Maintenance
487
BATTERY
For best battery service
Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
Keep the battery top clean and dry.
Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is main-
tenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked
with LOWER and UPPER on the
side, you can check the electrolyte
level. The electrolyte level should be
between LOWER and UPPER. If
the electrolyte level is low, it needs to
add distilled (demineralized) water
(Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful
not to splash the battery and adja-
cent components. And do not over-
fill the battery cells. It can cause cor-
rosion on other parts. After then
ensure that tighten the cell caps. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
ODM072021
749
Maintenance
Battery capacity label
The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capac-
ity (in Ampere
hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve
capacity (in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
(Continued)
When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
OJD072039
Example
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 min-
utes and get immediate
medical attention. If elec-
trolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you
feel a pain or a burning
sensation, get medical
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be
harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Maintenance
507
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
Sunroof (See section 4)
Trip computer (See section 4)
Climate control system
(See section 4)
Clock (See section 4)
Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the
charging rate if the battery cells
begin gassing (boiling) violently
or if the temperature of the elec-
trolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C
(120°F).
Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
Disconnect the battery charger
in the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery termi-
nal.
Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the bat-
tery.
(Continued)
751
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire under-
inflation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
ODMNMC2017
Maintenance
527
WARNING - Tire
inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
CAUTION
Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
753
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure.You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
WARNING
Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
Maintenance
547
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
Directional tires (if equipped)
755
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Replacing
tires
Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
Maintenance
567
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
(Continued)
The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped) to work
irregularly.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
757
Maintenance
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
587
(P)235/60R18 102H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
(if equipped)
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.5JX18
7.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
759
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life
(TIN : Tire Identification
Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
tire strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tires). Therefore, the
tires (including the spare tire) should
be replaced by new ones. You can
find the manufacturing date on the
tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of
the wheel), displaying the DOT
Code. The DOT Code is a series of
numbers on a tire consisting of num-
bers and English letters. The manu-
facturing date is designated by the
last four digits (characters) of the
DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
4. Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
Maintenance
607
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
761
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Maintenance
627
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
763
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the prop-
er fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and a possible
fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
BFT
Maintenance
647
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigar lighter
fuse.
ODM072017
ODM072018
CAUTION
When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may be fas-
tened incompletely, and it may
cause a possible fire. If fuses,
relays and terminals fastened
with bolts or nuts are blown,
we recommend that you con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system
malfunction.
765
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the Fuse switch at the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
ODM072019
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving
the vehicle.
ODM072027
ODM072028
Diesel only
Maintenance
667
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, we rec-
ommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the bolts shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse box
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water leaking
in.
ONCNMC2033
ONCDMC2037
767
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
ODM072017
ODMEMC2014
Maintenance
687
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, A/C Control Module
MODULE 5 7.5A
Rain Sensor, Sunroof, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Parking Guide System, AC,
Inverter Module, Rear Blower Relay, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Driver/Passenger
Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
MODULE 1 7.5A
Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Console Switch LH/RH, Front Console Switch,
Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH, RR_BLOWER SW
REAR FOG LAMP 10A ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)
MEMORY 2 10A
BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Driver IMS Module, Driver/Passenger Door
Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module,
Instrument Cluster
SMART KEY 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
MODULE 3 10A
BCM, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, AMP, Smart Parking Assist
Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Lane Departure Warning Module, Steering
Angle Sensor, Audio, A/C Control Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, 4WD ECM
ATM Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Seat Warmer
LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat
Warmer Module, Driver IMS Module, Console Switch LH/RH, Rear Console Switch,
Rear Parking Assist Sensor (Center) LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Electric
Parking Brake Module
SMART KEY 4 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
769
Maintenance
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
INTERIOR LAMP 15A
Cargo Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp Center Room Lamp,
Personal Lamp LH/RH
MULTI MEDIA
MULTI MEDIA
15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Digital Clock
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
HANDLE HTD 15A Steering Wheel Switch
MEMORY 1 10A RF Receiver, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch
START 7.5A
W/O IMMO. & Smart Key : ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
With IMMO./Smart Key : ECM/PCM, Transaxle Range Switch,
Smart Key Control Module, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 2)
MODULE 2 10A
Adaptive Front Lighting Module, Crash Pad Switch, Glow Relay Unit (DSL),
Multipurpose Check Connector, Head Lamp LH/RH, Head Lamp Leveling Device
Actuator LH/RH, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Diesel
Box (RLY. 1)(DSL)
SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
IGN 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - F36, F37, F38)
Maintenance
707
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
A/CON 1 7.5A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 4/14), A/C Control Module
Cluster Ionizer, Diesel Box (RLY. 3/4)
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch
SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
S/HEATER FRT 20A
Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module
Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module
C/LIGHTER 20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter, Luggage Power Outlet
WIPER FRT 15A Multifunction Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 9/11)
RR BLOWER 20A ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Relay)
P/WDW RH 25A
Passenger Safety Power Window Module Passenger Door Module,
Rear Power Window Switch RH Rear Safety Power Window Module RH
RR DEFOGGER 10A A/C Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
SUNROOF 1 20A Sunroof
771
Maintenance
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
P/WDW LH 25A
Driver Safety Power Window Module Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch
LH Rear Safety Power Window Module LH
FUEL LID 15A Fuel Fillar Door Switch
SMART KEY 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
STOP LAMP
STOP LAMP
15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
P/SEAT PASS 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
AMP 30A AMP
MODULE 4 10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Parking Guide System
Digital Clock, BCM, Overhead Console Lamp, AMP
Power Outside Mirror Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1)
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay
P/SEAT DRV 30A
Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch
Driver Lumbar Support Switch
Maintenance
727
Engine compartment fuse panel
ODM072050
ODMEMC2015
773
Maintenance
Relay NO. Symbol Relay Name Relay Type
E30 POWER OUTLET RELAY ISO MICRO
E31 START RELAY ISO MICRO
E32 FRONT DEICER RELAY ISO MICRO
E33 BLOWER RELAY ISO MICRO
E34 WIPER (LO) RELAY ISO MICRO
E35 COOLING FAN (LO) RELAY ISO MICRO
E36 ACC RELAY ISO MICRO
E37 IG1 RELAY ISO MICRO
E38 IG2 RELAY ISO MICRO
E39 COOLING FAN (HI) RELAY ISO MINI
E40 WIPER (HI) RELAY ISO MICRO
E41 REAR DEFOGGER RELAY ISO MICRO
E42 HORN RELAY ISO MICRO
E43 HEAD LAMP WASHER RELAY ISO MICRO
Maintenance
747
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI
FUSE
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
B+2 60A
Smart Junction Box (IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (1CH), IPS 5 (1CH), Fuse -
F31/F36/F41/F45)
BLOWER 40A RLY. 4 (Blower Relay)
RR HTD 40A RLY. 12 (Rear Defogger Relay)
ABS1 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module
C/FAN 60A
Except Europe - RLY. 6 (Cooling Fan (LO) Relay), RLY. 10 (Cooling Fan (HI)
Relay)
B+3 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F4/F5/F10/F21/F26, Leak Current Autocut Device)
FUSE
B+4 50A
Smart Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 4 (2CH), IPS 6 (2CH), Fuse -
F35/F38/F40/F44)
EMS 40A EMS Box
C/FAN 50A
Except Europe - RLY. 6 (Cooling Fan (LO) Relay), RLY. 10 (Cooling Fan (HI)
Relay)
IG1 40A Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), RLY. 7/8 (ACC/IG1 Relay, With Smart Key)
IG2 40A Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), RLY. 2 (Start Relay)/RLY. 9 (IG2 Relay)
TRAILER 30A Trailer Lamp & Power Outlet
775
Maintenance
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
B+1 50A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F22/F27/F32/F37/F42)
AC INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Module
HORN 15A RLY. 13 (Horn Relay)
ACTIVE HOOD LH 30A -
ACTIVE HOOD RH 30A -
EPB1 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
EPB2 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
DEICER 15A RLY. 3 (Front Deicer Relay)
H/LP WASHER 20A RLY. 14 (Head Lamp Washer Relay)
P/OUTLET 25A RLY. 1 (Power Outlet Relay)
4WD 20A 4WD ECM
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
TRAILER 2 15A Trailer Lamp & Power Outlet
Maintenance
767
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
TRAILER 1 15A Trailer Lamp & Power Outlet
WIPER 10A BCM, PCM/ECM
WIPER FRT 25A RLY. 5 (Wiper (LO) Relay), Front Wiper Motor
B/UP LAMP 10A
M/T - Back-Up Lamp Switch, A/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH,
Electro Chromic Mirror, Trailer Lamp & Power Outlet, Audio, A/V & Navigation
Head Unit
ABS3 7.5A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module
SENSOR5 7.5A PCM/ECM, Mass Air Flow Sensor
TCU 15A TCM (DSL), Transaxle Range Switch
F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay
ECU1 15A
G4KE/G4KJ/G6DF : PCM
D4HA/D4HB (VGT Regular Engine Pack) : TCM (A/T)
ECU2 10A D4HA/D4HB : Electronic VGT Actuator
SENSOR3 10A
G6DF : PCM, Injector #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Fuel Pump Relay
D4HA/D4HB (VGT Regular Engine Pack) : Lambda Sensor, Stop Lamp Switch
777
Maintenance
Description Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
IGN COIL 20A
G6DF : Condenser #1/#2, Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6
D4HA/D4HB : ECM
SENSOR2 10A
G6DF : PCM, Oil Control Valve #1/#2/#3/#4, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve
#1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve
D4HA/D4HB (VGT Regular Engine Pack) : EGR Cooling Bypass Solenoid
Valve, Lower Power EGR Valve, Crankshaft
Position Sensor, Fuel Pump Relay, E/R Fuse &
Relay Box (RLY. 6/10)
SENSOR1 15A
G6DF : PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 6/10)
D4HA/D4HB (VGT Regular Engine Pack) : Oil Level Sensor, Fuel Pressure
Regulating Valve, Rail Pressure Regulating Valve
SENSOR4 20A G4KE/G4KJ : PCM
B/ALARM 10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
Maintenance
787
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Diesel engine only)
ODM072049
ODMEMC2016
779
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse rating Protected Component
30A RLY. 1 (Fuel Filter Heater Relay)
1
50A RLY. 2 (PTC Heater Relay #1)
2
50A RLY. 3 (PTC Heater Relay #2)
3
50A RLY. 4 (PTC Heater Relay #3)
80A Glow Relay Unit
Circuit
Relay Type
Relay NO. Symbol Relay Name Relay Type
E44 RLY. 1 (Fuel Filter Heater Relay) MICRO PLUG
E45
1
RLY. 2 (PTC Heater Relay #1) MICRO PLUG
E46
2
RLY. 3 (PTC Heater Relay #2) MICRO PLUG
E47
3
RLY. 4 (PTC Heater Relay #3) MICRO PLUG
Maintenance
807
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
ing, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature differ-
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the head-
light assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
781
Maintenance
(Continued)
Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat
and burst when lit. A bulb
should be operated only when
installed in a headlamp.
If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
Headlamp, position lamp,
Front turn signal lamp, front
fog lamp bulb replacement
(1) Headlamp (High)
(2) Headlamp (Low)
(3) Position lamp (LED)
(4) Front turn signal lamp
(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
(6) Daytime running lamp
(if equipped)
Headlamp bulb
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen
bulbs
Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids.
(Continued)
ONCNMC2017
Maintenance
827
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
6. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight
aiming be adjusted after an accident
or after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled at a authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
1. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket
ODMNMC2022
L
L
o
o
w
w
H
H
i
i
g
g
h
h
ODMEMC2006
T
T
u
u
r
r
n
n
s
s
i
i
g
g
n
n
a
a
l
l
P
P
o
o
s
s
i
i
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
l
l
a
a
m
m
p
p
783
Maintenance
3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
4. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
ONCEMC3211
Maintenance
847
Headlamp (HID type), position
(LED) lamp, daytime running
lamp replacement
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandes-
cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relight when the head-
lamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lighting components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Headlight and front fog light
aiming (for Europe)
Headlight aiming
Without AFLS
1. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
WARNING - HID
Headlamp low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, we recom-
mend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
ONCEMC3205
785
Maintenance
4. With the head lamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical
lines.
5. To aim the low/high beam left or
right, turn the driver clockwise or
counterclockwise. To aim the
low/high beam up or down, turn
the driver clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
With AFLS
1. Turn off the engine
2. Turn the light switch to the low
beam position.
3. Position the tires straight ahead
with the steering wheel.
4. Turn on the engine.
5. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
6. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
7. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
8. With the head lamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical lines
after 20 seconds for AFLS system
initialization.
9. To aim the low beam left or right,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise. To aim the low beam
up or down, turn the driver clock-
wise or counterclockwise. To aim
the high beam up or down, turn
the driver clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
Maintenance
867
Front fog light aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as
the same manner of the head lamps
aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery
normal condition, aim the front fog
lamps. To aim the front fog lamp up
or down, turn the driver clockwise or
counterclockwise.
ONCEMC3206
787
Maintenance
Vehicle condition H1 H2
H3
W1 W2
W3
Fog
Fog+DRL Fog Fog+DRL
Without driver 888 (34.9) 868 (34.1) 584 (30)
584 (30)
1,420 (559) 1,193 (46.9) 1,544 (61)
1,544 (61)
With driver 883 (34.7) 863 (33.9) 579 (28)
579 (28)
Unit: mm (in)
<Ground Height>
<Distance between lamps>
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
Aiming point
ONCEMC3210
Maintenance
887
ONCEMC3207
Head lamp low beam (LHD)
1. Turn the low beam on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
Based on 3m screen
789
Maintenance
ONCEMC3208
Head lamp low beam (RHD)
1. Turn the low beam on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
Based on 3m screen
Maintenance
907
ONCEMC3209
Front fog light
1. Turn the front fog lamp on with the driver (75 kg) aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
Based on 3m screen
791
Maintenance
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
(1) Rear turn signal lamp
(2) Back-up lamp
(3) Tail/stop lamp
(4) Tail lamp (Bulb), Tail/stop lamp
(LED)
Outside lamp
Rear turn signal lamp and stop/tail
lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw-
driver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
ONCEMC3214
ONCNMC2037
Maintenance
927
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Inside lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
ODM072036
ONCNMC2038
793
Maintenance
Tail lamp/Back-up lamp (Bulb type)
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle
Rear fog lamp
1. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
3. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3.Disconnect the electrical connector.
ODMEMC2012
ONCNMC2039
OANNMC2037
Maintenance
947
4.Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
5.Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6.Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
ODMEMC2022 ODMEMC2021
B
A
ODM072039
795
Maintenance
Door courtesy lamp bulb
replacement (if equipped)
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend that the vehicle be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
ODM042261
Map lamp
OXM079044/ODM072041/ODM072043
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
Sunvisor lamp
Room lamp
ODM072040/ODM072042/ODM072052
Type A
Type B
Maintenance
967
Interior lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
797
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted
surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION
Do not use strong soap, chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
Maintenance
987
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and
similar materials with a spot remover
will usually strip the wax from the fin-
ish. Be sure to re-wax these areas
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
CAUTION
Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
799
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
1007
Aluminum or chrome wheel
maintenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum or
chrome wheels. They may scratch
or damage the finish.
Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum or chrome
wheels coated with a clear protec-
tive finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your car are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
7101
Maintenance
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion. High tempera-
tures can also accelerate corrosion
of parts that are not properly ventilat-
ed so the moisture can be dispersed.
For all these reasons, it is particular-
ly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only
to the visible surfaces but particular-
ly to the underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame mem-
bers, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape and not be trapped inside
to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or cov-
ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to cor-
rosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
Maintenance
1027
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
7103
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Maintenance
1047
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Service
Passport in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Contol (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
7105
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poison-
ing.
Maintenance
1067
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park,
idle, or drive the vehicle over
or near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
7107
Maintenance
Diesel Particulate Filter
(if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
system removes the soot emitted
from the vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxi-
dizes) and removes the accumulated
soot according to the driving condi-
tion. In other words, the active burn-
ing by engine control system and
high exhaust gas temperature
caused by normal/high driving condi-
tion burns and removes the accumu-
lated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to
be driven at low speed for long time,
the accumulated soot may not be
automatically removed because of
low exhaust gas temperature. In this
particular case, the amount of soot is
out of detection limit, the soot oxida-
tion process by engine control sys-
tem may not happen and the mal-
function indicator light may blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving
the vehicle at more than 60km/h (37
mph) or at more than second gear
with 1500 ~ 2000 engine rpm for a
certain time (for about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light con-
tinues to be blinked in spite of the
procedure, please visit an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and then check the
DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the mal-
function indicator light blinking for a
long time, the DPF system can be
damaged and fuel consumption can
be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the
regulated automotive diesel fuel
for diesel vehicle equipped with
the DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including
high sulfur (more than 50 ppm
sulfur) and unspecified addi-
tives, it can cause the DPF sys-
tem to be damaged and white
smoke can be emitted.
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load and speed capacity tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS
*
1
with roof rack
ENGINE
Item
Gasoline
lambda II 3.3
Diesel R2.2
Displacement cc
(cu. in)
3,342
(203.94)
2,199
(134.19)
Bore x Stroke mm
(in.)
92X83.8
(3.62X3.29)
85.4X96
(3.34X3.77)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders V - type
4. In-line
item mm(in)
Overall length 4,915 (193.5)
Overall width 1,885 (74)
Overall height 1,690 (66.5)/1,700 *
1
(66.9)
Front tread
235/60R18 1,628 (64.1)
235/55R19 1,628 (64.1)
Rear tread
235/60R18 1,639 (64.5)
235/55R19 1,639 (64.5)
Wheelbase 2,800 (110)
83
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
* If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlights(Low) 55 or 35(HID) * H7L or D3S
Headlights(High) 55 H7L
Front turn signal lamps 21 PY21W
Front position lights 5 or LED W5W or LED
Front fog lights * 35 H8
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) LED LED
Daytime running lights * LED LED
Rear
Rear fog lights * 21 P21W
Rear Stop/Tail lights (outside) 21/5, LED P21/5W, LED
Rear tail lights (Inside) 8 W8W
Rear Stop/Tail lights (Inside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lights 21 PY21W
Back-up lights 16 W16W
High mounted stop light LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 10 FESTOON
Room lamps 8 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Door courtesy lamps 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
Specifications & Consumer information
48
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load
()
Maximum load
()
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
235/60R18 7.5J×18
2.3
(33,230)
2.3
(33,230)
2.3
(33,230)
2.3
(33,230)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
235/55R19 7.5J×19
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T165/90R17 4.0T×17
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
235/60R18 7.5J×18 103 875 H 210
235/55R19 7.5J×19 101 825 H 210
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T165/90R17 4.0T×17 116 1250 M 130
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES
85
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
Item
Lambda II 3.3 R2.2
2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
6 Seater - 2,600 (5,732) - 2,600 (5,732)
7 Seater - 2,600 (5,732) - 2,630 (5,798)
Item
Lambda II 3.3 R2.2
2WD
4WD
2WD 4WD
6 Seater 2,600 (5,732)
2,600 (5,732) - 2,600 (5,732)
7 Seater 2,600 (5,732)
2,600 (5,732) - 2,600 (5,732)
For GENERAL, MIDDLE EAST
For EUROPE
ltem 6 Seater 7 Seater
VDA
MIN. 634 (22.4) 634 (22.4)
MAX. 1,875 (66) 1,842 (65)
Min : Behind 2nd seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Kg (lbs)
Kg (lbs)
l (cu ft)
Specifications & Consumer information
68
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Gasoline
Engine
3.3L
5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
API Service SM *
3
, ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 (or above)
Diesel
Engine
with DPF *
4
6.3 l (6.66 US qt.)
ACEA C2 (C3)
without DPF *
4
6.3 l (6.66 US qt.)
ACEA B4
Engine oil consumption
Normal driving condition MAX. 1L / 1,500 km -
Severe driving condition MAX. 1L / 1,000 km -
Automatic transaxle fluid
Gasoline
Engine
3.3L
7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV,
SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Diesel
Engine
R2.2
7.7 l (8.13 US qt.)
Coolant
Gasoline
Engine
3.3L
9.1 l (9.61 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for
aluminum radiator)
Diesel
Engine
R2.2
9.1 ~ 9.3 l
(9.61 ~ 9.82 US qt.)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.74~0.85 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
87
Specifications & Consumer information
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-
my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in
everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
*
4
Diesel Particulate Filter
Lubricant Volume Classification
Rear differential oil (4WD)
0.53 l (0.56 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (4WD)
R2.2L
0.6 l (0.63US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
3.3L
0.68 l (0.72 US qt.)
Fuel
71 l (18.75 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
Available Engine oil (For Europe)
Supplier
Product
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine
Shell
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
SK ZIC LD5W-30 ZIC LS 5W-30
Chevron KIXX G1 LL KIXX D1 5W-30
Total
QUARTZ HKS G-310
QUARTZ INEO MC3 5W-30
QUARTZ INEO MC3 5W-30
Fuchs TITAN SUPERSYN LONG LIFE 5W-30/40
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the rec-
ommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20*
2
(API SM / ILSAC GF-4/ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
(3.3L)
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Diesel Engine Oil
5W-30/40
15W-40
10W-30/40
0W-30/40
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20 *
2
, 5W-30
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the
engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s (or front pas-
senger’s) side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OEN086004N
VIN label (if equipped)
OCM056002
ODM082001
ODMEVS2002
Frame number
Type B
Type A
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
ODMNMC2017
OXM089006L
ODM082003
Gasoline engine (3.3L)
Diesel engine
OHC081001
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
811
Specifications & Consumer information
The refrigerant label is located at the
front of the engine room.
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of con-
formity is available on HYUNDAI
web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
REFRIGERANT LABEL
ODMNMC2016
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
CE0678
Sample
Appendix
Шофиране през зимата (Bulgarian). . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vinterkørsel (Danish). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Rijden in de winter (Dutch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Téli vezetés (Hungarian) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vetrarakstur (Icelandic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Guida invernale (Italian) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Kjøre om vinteren (Norwegian) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Jazda zimą (Polish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Conduçăo no inverno (Portuguese) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9
Appendix
29
Тежките зимни атмосферни условия
могат да предизвикат по-голямо
износване и други проблеми. За да
сведете до минимум проблемите,
свързани с шофирането през зимата,
следвайте препоръките по-долу:
Сняг или поледица
За да карате своето превозно
средство при дълбока снежна
покривка може да се наложи да
използвате зимни гуми или да
поставите вериги върху тях. Ако са
необ ходими зимни гуми, трябва да
изберете гуми със същия размер и вид
като тези на оригиналните гуми.
В противен случай това може да се
отрази неблагоприятно на
безопасността и експлоатацията на
Вашия автомобил. Освен това карането
с висока скорост, бързото ускорение,
внезапното натискане на спирачки и
резките завои крият сериозни опасности.
При забавяне на скоростта, използвайте
доколкото е възможно спирачките на
дви гателя. Внезапното натискане на
спирачки на заснежена или заледена
настилка може да предизвика занасяне.
Трябва да под държате достатъчна
дистанция между автомобила, който се
движи пред Вас, и Вашия автомобил.
Освен това натискайте спирачката леко.
Следва да се отбележи че
инсталирането на веригите върху гума
та ще позволи прилагането на по-голяма
движеща сила, но няма да предотврати
занасянето встрани.
БЕЛЕЖКА
Веригите за гуми не са позволени
във всички държави. Проверете
норма тивната уредба в своята
страна преди да поставите вериги
за гуми.
ШОФИРАНЕ ПРЕЗ ЗИМАТА (BULGARIAN)
1VQA3005
93
Appendix
Г уми за сняг
Ако поставите гуми за сняг на своя авто-
мобил се уверете, че това са
радиалнигуми със същия размер и
товарен индекс като тези на
оригиналните гуми. Поставете гуми за
сняг на всичките четири колела, за да
балансирате експлоатацията на своя
автомобил във всякакви атмос- ферни
условия. Имайте предвид, че тягата на
гумите за сняг върху суха настилка не
може да бъде толкова голяма колкото
тази на оригиналните гуми. Следва да
карате внимателно, дори когато
пътищата са почистени. Консултирайте
се с доставчика на гуми за
максималната препоръчителна скорост.
Не монтирайте гуми с шипове, преди
да сте проверили местните,
национални и общински разпоредби
за възможни огра- ничения в тяхната
употреба.
Вериги за гуми
Тъй като страниците на радиалните
гуми са по-тънки, те могат да се
повредят, ако върху тях се монтират
някои видове вери- ги за сняг. Ето
защо се препоръчва изпол- зването на
гуми за сняг, а не на вериги за сняг. Не
поставяйте вериги върху автомо-
били, чиито колела са с алуминиеви
джан- ти; веригите за сняг могат да
повредят колелата. Ако трябва да се
използват вериги за сняг, използвайте
телени вериги с дебелина от поне 15
мм. Повредата на Вашия автомобил
вследствие на непра- вилната
употреба на вериги за сняг не е в
обхвата на гаранцията на
производителя на Вашия автомобил.
1VQA3007
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
- Размер на гумите за сняг
Г умите за сняг следва да са
равностойни по размер и тип на
тези на стандартните гуми на
автомобила. В противен случай
това може да се отрази
неблагоприятно на безопасността
и експлоатацията на Вашия
автомобил.
Appendix
49
При използване вериги за движение
по сняг, закрепвайте ги към водещите
колела както следва.
2WD : Предни колела
4WD : Всичките четири колела
Ако за автомобил 4WD не е наличен
пълен комплект вериги, тогава можете
да монтирате вериги само на
предните колела.
ВНИМАНИЕ
Уверете се, че размерът и
видът на веригите са
правилните за Вашите гуми.
Неправилните вериги за сняг
могат да повредят
каросерията и окачването на
автомобила и този тип повреда
може да не е в обхвата на
производствената гаранция за
Вашия автомобил. Също така
куките за свързване на веригите
за сняг могат да се повредят от
намиращите се в контакт с тях
автомобилни части, като това
може да доведе до
разхлабването им. Уверете се,
че веригите за сняг са от клас S
според класификацията на
Дружеството на
автомобилните инженери (SAE).
Винаги проверявайте дали
вериги- те са били поставени
правилно след като изминете
около 0,5 до 1 км, за да се
уверите в безопасното им
поставяне. Затегнете
веригите или ги поставете
отново, ако са се разхлабили.
95
Appendix
Монтиране на вериги
Когато инсталирате веригите, следвайте
инструкциите на производителя и ги
затег- нете максимално. Карайте бавно с
инста- лирани вериги. Ако чуете, че
веригите са навлезли в контакт с
каросерията или шасито, спрете и ги
затегнете. Ако те все още са в контакт,
намалете скоростта до преустановяване
на контакта. Свалете веригите веднага,
щом започнете да кара- те по
почистените пътища.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
- Вериги за гуми
• Използването на вериги може
да се отрази неблагоприятно на
работата на Вашия автомобил.
Не надвишавайте пределната
ско- рост, препоръчана от
производителя, или скоростта
от 30 км/ч, което е по- ниско.
Карайте внимателно и
избягвайте неравности, дупки,
резки завои и други опасности
на пътя, които могат да накарат
автомобила да подскача.
• Избягвайте резките завои или
изпол- зването на спирачки, ако
колелата са блокирани.
ВНИМАНИЕ
Веригите с грешен размер или
тези, които са неправилно
инсталирани, могат да
повредят спирачните накладки,
окачването, каросерията и
колелата.
Спрете и затегнете веригите
повтор- но винаги, щом ги
чуете да удрят автомобила.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
- Поставяне на вериги
Когато поставите вериги за сняг ,
пар- кирайте автомобила на равно
място далеч от пътното
движение. Включете аварийните
светлини и поставете
светлоотразителния три- ъгълник
зад автомобила, ако разпо- лагате
с такъв. Винаги паркирайте
автомобила в паркинг, дръпнете
ръч-ната спирачка и изключете
двигате- ля преди да поставите
веригите за сняг.
Appendix
69
Jo hårdere vintervejret er, jo større slid
og jo flere problemer skaber det. For at
minimere problemerne ved vinterkørsel,
r De følge disse råd:
Sne og is på vejene
For at kunne køre i dyb sne kan det være
dvendigt med vinerdæk eller at
installere snekæder på hjulene. Hvis det
er nødvendigt med vinterdæk, skal De
vælge dæk der svarer i størrelse og type
til de originale dæk. Hvis De undlader
dette, kan det have en uheldig virkning
på Deres bils sikkerhed og
reegenskaber. Desuden vil kørsel med
j hastighed, hurtig acceleration,
pludselige opbremsninger og skarpe
sving være potentielt meget farlige
manøvrer.
Ved nedbremsning skal De bruge
motorbremsen mest muligt. Pludselige
opbremsninger på en sne- og isbelagt
vej kan forårsage udskridning. De skal
holde tilstrækkelig afstand mellem Deres
bil og den forankørende. De skal også
trykke let på bremsen. Det skal
bemærkes, at brug af snekæder vil give
større trækkraft, men vil ikke forhindre
udskridning til siden.
BEMÆRK
Snekæder er ikke tilladte i alle lande.
Kontrollér lovgivningen inden De
monterer snekæder.
Vinterdæk
Hvis De monterer vinterdæk på bilen,
skal de sikre, at det er radialdæk af
samme størrelse og belastningsklasse
som de originale dæk. Montér vinterdæk
på alle fire hjul for at balancere Deres bils
reegenskaber i al slags vejr. De skal
huske på, at den trækkraft som Deres
vinterdæk giver på en tør vejbane, måske
ikke er så god som med de oprindelige
dæk. De bør køre med forsigtighed, også
selvom vejene er rene. Forhør Dem hos
Deres dækforhandler mht. anbefalet
maksimumshastighed.
De skal ikke montere pigdæk uden først
at have kontrolleret Deres lands
lovgivning om brugen af pigdæk.
VINTERKØRSEL (DANISH)
ADVARSEL
- Vinterdækkenes størrelse
Vinterdæk skal være af samme
størrelse og type som bilens
standarddæk. I modsat fald kan det
have en negativ effekt på Deres bils
sikkerhed og køreegenskaber.
1VQA3005
97
Appendix
Snekæder
Da siderne på radialdæk er tyndere, kan
de blive beskadiget af montering af nogle
typer snekæder. Derfor anbefales brugen
af vinterdæk i stedet for snekæder.
Undgå at montere snekæder på biler
udstyret med aluminiumsfælge, fordi
snekæder kan beskadige hjulene. Hvis
der skal bruges snekæder, skal De bruge
snekæder af wiretypen med en tykkelse
på mindre end 15 mm. Skader,
forårsaget af ukorrekte snekæder,
dækkes ikke af Deres bils fabriksgaranti.
Ved brug af snekæder, skal de fastgøres
til de trækkende hjul som følger.
2WD: Forhjul
4WD: Alle fire hjul
Hvis De ikke kan skaffe et helt sæt
kæder til en 4WD, kan der
monteres kæder kun på forhjulene.
FORSIGTIG
De bør sikre Dem, at snekæderne
er korrekte med hensyn til
størrelse og type til Deres bil.
Ukorrekte snekæder kan
forårsage beskadigelse af Deres
bils chassis og hjulophæng og vil
måske ikke blive dækket af Deres
bils fabriksgaranti. Desuden kan
snekædernes kroge blive
beskadiget af hjulenes kom
-
ponenter og få snekæderne til at
løsne sig fra dækket. De skal
sikre Dem, at snekæderne er
SAE-certificerede i klasse "S".
De skal altid kontrollere, at
monteringen af kæderne er i
orden, når De har kørt ca. 0,5 til 1
km for at sikre, at monteringen er
i orden. Spænd efter eller
genmontér kæderne, hvis de er
løse.
1VQA3007
Appendix
89
Montering af snekæder
Ved montering af snekæder skal De altid
lge fabrikkens instruktioner og montere
dem så stramt som muligt. r langsomt,
hvis De har snekæder monteret. Hvis De
rer, at kæderne rører bilens chassis,
skal De standse og spænde dem. Hvis
de stadig rammer chassis'et, skal De
sagtne farten, indtil det ophører. Fjern
kæderne hurtigst muligt, så snart De
rer på tørre veje igen.
ADVARSEL
- Montering af snekæder
Før montering af snekæder skal De
parkere bilen på en plan grund væk
fra trafikken. Tænd for bilens
havariblink og anbring om muligt
en advarselstrekant bagved bilen.
De skal altid sætte gearet i P
(parkering), trække parkerings
-
bremsen og slukke for motoren
førend snekæderne monteres.
FORSIGTIG
Snekæder, der ikke har den
korrekte størrelse eller er forkert
monteret, kan beskadige Deres
bils bremsebelægning, ophæng
-
ning, chassis og hjul.
Stop kørslen og genspænd
kæderne, hver gang De hører, at
de rammer bilen.
ADVARSEL - Snekæder
Brug af snekæder kan påvirke
bilens køreegenskaber i negativ
retning.
Kør ikke mere end 30 km/t eller
fabrikkens anbefalede
hastighedsgrænse, den laveste
gælder.
Kør forsigtigt og undgå bump,
huller, skarpe sving og andre
trafikmæssige risici, der kan få
bilen til at hoppe.
Undgå skarpe sving eller
bremsning med blokerede
bremser.
99
Appendix
De slechtere weersomstandigheden in
de winter leiden tot meer slijtage en
andere problemen. Volg onderstaande
aanwijzingen om de problemen tijdens
het rijden in de winter tot een minimum te
beperken:
Sneeuw en ijs
Om met uw auto op een besneeuwd
wegdek te kunnen rijden, kan het
noodzakelijk zijn gebruik te maken van
winterbanden of sneeuwkettingen onder
uw auto te monteren. Kies voor
winterbanden van dezelfde maat en
hetzelfde type als de oorspronkelijk
onder de auto gemonteerde banden. Het
niet in acht nemen van dit advies kan de
veiligheid en de rijeigenschappen van uw
auto nadelig beïnvloeden. Verder zijn
hoge snelheden, plotseling remmen en
het nemen van scherpe bochten
potentieel gevaarlijke situaties.
Probeer bij het afremmen zoveel
mogelijk op de motor af te remmen. Door
plotseling te remmen op een met sneeuw
of ijs bedekte weg kan de auto in een slip
raken. Bewaar voldoende afstand tot uw
voorligger. Trap verder het rempedaal
met beleid in. Het monteren van
sneeuwkettingen zorgt wel voor een
betere grip maar kan niet voorkomen dat
de auto in een slip raakt.
AANWIJZING
Het gebruik van sneeuwkettingen is niet
in alle landen toegestaan. Controleer
voor het monteren van sneeuwkettingen
of dat wettelijk is toegestaan.
Winterbanden
Als u winterbanden op uw auto laat
monteren, controleer dan of deze
dezelfde maat en beladingsindex hebben
als de originele banden. Monteer
sneeuwbanden op alle vier de wielen,
voor een optimale wegligging onder alle
weersomstandigheden. Houd er
rekening mee dat de grip op een droog
wegdek met winterbanden iets lager is
dan met de originele banden. Rijd ook
voorzichtig als de weg vrij is. Raadpleeg
uw bandenleverancier voor de maximum
snelheid van de banden.
Monteer geen banden met spikes zonder
eerst na te gaan of het gebruik hiervan
niet wettelijk verboden is.
RIJDEN IN DE WINTER (DUTCH)
WAARSCHUWING
- Afmetingen winterbanden
De maat en het type van de
winterbanden moeten gelijk zijn
aan die van de standaard
gemonteerde banden. Anders kan
de veiligheid en het rijgedrag van
uw auto negatief beïnvloed worden.
1VQA3005
Appendix
109
Sneeuwkettingen
Omdat de wangen van een radiaalband
vrij dun zijn, kunnen ze door sommige
typen sneeuwkettingen beschadigd
raken. Daarom wordt aanbevolen om
winterbanden te gebruiken in plaats van
sneeuwkettingen. Monteer geen
sneeuwkettingen op auto’s met
lichtmetalen velgen, omdat de velgen
daardoor beschadigd kunnen raken. Als
het onvermijdelijk is om sneeuwkettingen
te gebruiken, gebruik dan
sneeuwkettingen met een dikte van
minder dan 15 mm. Schade aan uw auto
die het gevolg is van het gebruik van
ongeschikte sneeuwkettingen valt niet
onder de fabrieksgarantie van uw auto.
Breng, wanneer u sneeuwkettingen
gebruikt, de sneeuwkettingen als volgt
aan op de aangedreven wielen.
2WD: Voorwielen
4WD: Alle wielen
Als voor een 4WD-auto geen
complete set kettingen
beschikbaar is, brengt u de
kettingen alleen aan op de
voorwielen.
OPMERKING
Zorg ervoor dat de
sneeuwkettingen geschikt zijn
voor de maat en het type band dat
op uw auto gemonteerd is.
Ongeschikte sneeuwkettingen
kunnen schade toebrengen aan
de carrosserie en de
wielophanging, wat buiten de
fabrieksgarantie valt. Bovendien
kunnen de bevestigingshaken
beschadigd raken bij contact met
de auto, waardoor de
sneeuwkettingen los kunnen
raken. Gebruik uitsluitend
sneeuwkettingen van SAE-klasse
S.
Controleer nadat u ongeveer 0,5 -
1 km hebt gereden of de kettingen
nog goed zitten. Span de
kettingen of monteer ze opnieuw
als ze los zitten.
1VQA3007
911
Appendix
Aanbrengen van sneeuwkettingen
Volg voor het plaatsen van de kettingen
de aanwijzingen van de fabrikant en trek
de kettingen zo strak mogelijk aan. Matig
uw snelheid als u met sneeuwkettingen
rijdt. Als u de kettingen tegen de
carrosserie of het chassis hoort slaan,
stop dan meteen en trek de kettingen
aan. Als ze daarna nog tegen de auto
slaan, matig uw snelheid dan totdat dit
niet meer gebeurt. Verwijder de kettingen
zodra u weer op een schone weg rijdt.
WAARSCHUWING
- Sneeuwkettingen
Het rijgedrag van de auto kan
door het gebruik van kettingen
negatief beïnvloed worden.
Rijd nooit sneller dan 30 km/h of
sneller dan de door de fabrikant
aanbevolen snelheid. Houd de
laagste snelheid aan.
Rijd voorzichtig en vermijd
oneffenheden, gaten, scherpe
bochten en andere situaties
waardoor de auto plotseling zou
kunnen uitveren.
Vermijd het maken van scherpe
bochten en het remmen met
geblokkeerde wielen.
OPMERKING
Kettingen die een verkeerde maat
hebben of niet goed gemonteerd
zijn, kunnen de remleidingen,
wielophanging, carrosserie, en
velgen van uw auto beschadigen.
Stop onmiddellijk en span de
kettingen aan zodra u ze tegen de
auto hoort tikken.
WAARSCHUWING
- Monteren van
sneeuwkettingen
Parkeer de auto op een vlakke
ondergrond en uit de buurt van het
overige verkeer voor het monteren
van de sneeuwkettingen. Zet de
alarmknipperlichten aan en plaats
indien mogelijk een
gevarendriehoek achter de auto.
Zet de transmissie in stand P
(Parkeren), activeer de parkeerrem
en zet de motor af alvorens de
sneeuwkettingen te monteren.
Appendix
129
Télen a nehéz időjárási feltételek
nagyobb elhasználódást és más
problémákat eredményezhetnek. A téli
vezetés problémáinak csökkentése
érdekében célszerű követnie a következő
javaslatokat:
Havas vagy jeges útviszonyok
Mély hóban közlekedéshez szükség
lehet téli gumiabroncsok használatára
vagy kerekeire hólánc felszerelésére. Ha
téli gumiabroncsokra van szüksége, a
gyárilag felszerelttel megegyező méretű
és típusú gumiabroncsot kell választani.
Ennek figyelmen kívül hagyása
hátrányosan befolyásolja gépkocsija
biztonságát és vezethetőségét. Ezen
túlmenően a nagy sebességű haladás, a
hirtelen gyorsítás, a hirtelen fékezés és a
gyors kanyarvétel nagyon veszélyes
gyakorlat.
Lassításkor a lehető legjobban használja
ki motorja fékhatását. Havas vagy jeges
úton a hirtelen fékezés megcsúszást
okozhat. Elegendően nagy követési
távolságot kell tartania saját gépkocsija
és az Ön előtt haladó jármű között. Tehát
óvatosan fékezzen. Jegyezze meg, hogy
hólánc használatakor megnő a hajtóerő,
de nem segít az oldalra kicsúszás
elkerülésében.
MEGJEGYZÉS
A hólánc nem legális minden országban.
Ellenőrizze az Ön országának
törvényeit, mielőtt felszereli a hóláncot.
Téli gumiabroncs
Ha téli gumiabroncsot akar használni,
elõször gyõzõdjön meg arról, hogy ezek
megfelelõ méretû és terhelhetõségû
radiál abroncsok. Kifejezetten javasoljuk,
hogy mind a négy kerékre szereltessen
téli gumiabroncsot, hogy biztosítsa
gépkocsija jó vezethetõségét. Ne feledje,
hogy a téli gumiabroncsok tapadása
száraz úton nem olyan jó, mint a
gépkocsira eredetileg felszerelt
gumiabroncsoké. Még tiszta úton is
óvatosan kell vezetnie. Tájékozódjon a
gumiszerelõnél a megengedett
legnagyobb sebességgel kapcsolatban.
Ne szereltessen fel szöges
gumiabroncsot, mielőtt tájékozódna a
használatukra, illetve esetleges tiltásukra
vonatkozó helyi előírásokról.
TÉLI VEZETÉS (HUNGARIAN)
VIGYÁZAT! - A téli
gumiabroncsok mérete
A téli gumiabroncsnak mind
méretében, mind szerkezetében meg
kell egyeznie az eredeti nyárival.
Ellenkező esetben gépkocsija
biztonsága és vezethetősége
kedvezőtlenül változhat.
1VQA3005
913
Appendix
Hólánc
Mivel a radiál gumiabroncsok oldalfala
vékonyabb, megsérülhetnek bizonyos
fajtájú hólánc felszerelésétől. Ezért
inkább javasoljuk a téli gumiabroncsok
használatát, mint a hólánc használatát.
Ne szereljen fel hóláncot alumínium
keréktárcsás kerékre, mivel a hólánc
sérüléseket okozhat a keréktárcsán. Ha
mégis hóláncot kellene használnia,
használjon 15 mm-es átmérőnél kisebb,
kábeltípusú hóláncot. Gépkocsijának a
hólánc helytelen használatából eredő
káraira nem vonatkozik a garancia.
Ha hóláncot szándékozik használni, a
vetkezők szerint szerelje fel a hajtó
kerekekre:
Kétkerékhajtású (2WD) gépkocsik:
Az első kerekekre
Összkerékhajtású (4WD) gépkocsik:
Mind a négy kerékre
Ha az összkerékhajtású (4WD)
gépkocsira nem kapható teljes készlet
hólánc, akkor felszerelhető a hólánc csak
a két első kerékre.
FIGYELEM!
• Ügyeljen arra, hogy a hólánc a
gumiabroncsaihoz megfelelő
méretű és típusú legyen. A nem
megfelelő méretű hólánc
megrongálhatja gépkocsija
karosszériáját és
felfüggesztéseit, és erre nem
vonatkozik a gépkocsi garanciája.
Ezenkívül a hólánc összekötő
kapcsai megsérülhetnek a
karosszériához ütődéstől, amitől
a hólánc meglazulhat, és leeshet
a kerékről. Kizárólag az SAE
szabvány szerinti "S" osztályú
hóláncot használjon.
0,5 - 1km megtétele után
ellenőrizze megfelelő
elhelyezkedésüket a biztonságos
felszerelésük érdekében. Ha
meglazultak, húzza meg újra, vagy
szerelje fel ismét a hóláncokat.
1VQA3007
Appendix
149
A hólánc felszerelése
A hólánc felszerelésekor figyelmesen
vesse gyártójának utasításait, és a
lehető legfeszesebbre húzza meg a
láncot. A felszerelt hólánccal lassan
közlekedjen. Ha a lánc hozzáverődik a
karosszériához vagy az alvázhoz, álljon
meg és feszítsen rajta. Ha még mindig
hozzáér, lassítson le annyira, hogy
megszűnjön a kontaktus. Haladéktalanul
távolítsa el a láncokat, amint tiszta útra ér.
FIGYELEM!
A nem megfelelő méretű vagy
rosszul felszerelt hólánc
megrongálhatja gépkocsija
féktömlőit, felfüggesztéseit,
karosszériáját és a kerekeit.
Álljon meg és húzza feszesebbre
a hóláncokat, ha beleütnek a
gépkocsi valamelyik alkatrészébe.
VIGYÁZAT! - Hólánc
A hólánc használata jelentősen
korlátozza a gépkocsi
kezelhetőségét.
Ne lépje túl a 30 km/h sebességet,
vagy a hólánc gyártója által
meghatározott maximális
sebességet. Mindig a kettő közül
alacsonyabb értéket tartsa be.
Vezessen óvatosan, kerülje a
bukkanókat, lyukakat, éles
kanyarokat és az úton előforduló
egyéb veszélyforrásokat, melyek
a gépkocsi erős berugózását
okozzák.
Tartózkodjon az éles
kanyarvételtől és a blokkoló
kerekekkel történő fékezéstől.
VIGYÁZAT! - Hólánc
felszerelése
forgalomtól távol eső sík felületen
álljon félre. Kapcsolja be a
vészvillogót és tegyen ki
elakadásjelző háromszöget a
gépkocsi mögé. A hólánc
felszerelése előtt mindig kapcsolja P
állásba a sebességváltó
választókarját, működtesse a
rögzítőféket, majd állítsa le a motort.
915
Appendix
Akstur í þungri færð og vetrarveðri leiðir
til aukins slits á ökutækinu og skapar
ýmis vandamál. Hægt er að draga úr erf-
iðleikum sem fylgja vetrarakstri ef farið er
að þessum ráðleggingum:
Akstur í snjó eða hálku
Við akstur í djúpum snjó kann að vera
nauðsynlegt að nota vetrarhjólbarða eða
setja keðjur á hjólbarðana. Reynist nauð-
synlegt að nota vetrarhjólbarða þarf að
velja hjólbarða af sömu stærð og gerð og
venjulegu hjólbarðarnir. Sé það ekki gert
getur það dregið úr öryggi og skert akst-
urseiginleika ökutækisins. Hraðakstur,
skyndileg hröðun, nauðhemlun og krapp-
ar beygjur geta enn fremur falið í sér
mikla hættu.
Þegar dregið er úr hraða er ráðlegt að
beita vélarhemlun sem kostur er. Við
nauðhemlun á snævi þöktum eða hálum
vegum getur ökutækið hæglega runnið
til. Nauðsynlegt er að halda hæfilegri fjar-
lægð á milli þíns ökutækis og ökutækis-
ins fyrir framan. Alltaf ætti að beita heml-
inum mjúklega. Hafa ber í huga að ef
keðjur eru settar á hjólbarða fæst aukinn
drifkraftur en það hindrar þó ekki að öku-
tækið renni til hliðanna.
ATHUGIÐ
Notkun snjókeðja er ólögleg í sumum
ríkjum. Kynnið ykkur gildandi lands-
lög áður en keðjur eru settar upp.
Vetrarhjólbarðar
Ef vetrarhjólbarðar eru settir á ökutækið
þarf að gæta þess að nota þverofna hjól-
barða af sömu stærð og ásþunga og
upprunalegu hjólbarðarnir. Setjið vetrar-
hjólbarða á öll fjögur hjólin til að tryggja
örugga stýringu ökutækisins við öll veð-
urskilyrði. Hafið í huga að á auðum vegi
kunna vetrarhjólbarðar að hafa minna
grip en hjólbarðarnir sem fylgdu ökutæk-
inu. Því þarf að aka af gætni, jafnvel á
auðum vegum. Ráðfærið ykkur við sölu-
aðila hjólbarðanna um ráðlagðan
hámarkshraða.
Áður en negldir hjólbarðar eru settir upp
er rétt að kynna sér reglugerðir um notk-
un slíkra hjólbarða í viðkomandi landi,
fylki eða sveitarfélagi.
VETRARAKSTUR (ICELANDIC)
1VQA3005
VIÐVÖRUN
- stærðir vetrarhjólbarða
Vetrarhjólbarðar ættu að vera af
sömu stærð og gerð og hjólbarð-
arnir sem fylgdu ökutækinu.
Misræmi á því getur dregið úr öryggi
og skert aksturseiginleika
ökutækisins.
Appendix
169
Keðjur á hjólbarða
Hliðar þverofinna hjólbarða eru þynnri en
á öðrum hjólbörðum og sumar gerðir
snjókeðja geta því valdið skemmdum á
þeim. Því er ráðlegt að nota vetrarhjól-
barða fremur en keðjur, ef þess er kostur.
Setjið aldrei keðjur á hjólbarða ökutækja
sem búin eru álfelgum þar sem keðjurn-
ar geta valdið skemmdum á felgunum. Ef
óhjákvæmilegt reynist að nota keðjur
skal nota vírkeðjur sem eru innan við 15
mm á þykkt. Ábyrgðartrygging söluaðila
ökutækisins tekur ekki til skemmda sem
orsakast af rangri notkun snjókeðja.
Þegar notaðar eru snjókeðjur skal setja
þau á hjólin sem eru með drifi eins og hér
er lýst.
Framhjóladrif: framhjólin
Fjórhjóladrif: öll fjögur hjólin. Ef ekki eru
fjórar keðjur til staðar heldur einungis
tvær er mælt með að nota þær á
framhjólin.
1VQA3007
VARÚÐ
Gætið þess að snjókeðjurnar séu
af þeirri stærð og gerð sem hæfir
hjólbörðunum. Notkun snjókeðja
af rangri gerð getur valdið
skemmdum á yfirbyggingu og
fjöðrun ökutækisins og kann að
falla utan ábyrgðartryggingar
sölu- aðila ökutækisins. Þá geta
festi- krókar keðjanna skemmst
vegan núnings við íhluti
ökutækisins og snjókeðjurnar
losnað af hjólbarð- anum. Gætið
þess að snjókeðjurn-ar séu með
SAE-vottun í S-flokki.
Eftir um það bil 0,5-1 km akstur
skal ævinlega skoða keðjurnar
aftur til að tryggja að þær hafi
verið settar upp á réttan og
öruggan hátt. Herðið keðjurnar
eða setjið þær aftur á ef þær hafa
losnað.
917
Appendix
Uppsetning á keðjum
Þegar keðjur eru settar á skal fylgja leið-
beiningum framleiðanda og herða keðj-
urnar eins mikið og unnt er. Þegar keðjur
hafa verið settar á skal aka hægt. Ef hljóð
heyrist sem bendir til að keðjurnar séu í
snertingu við yfirbyggingu eða undirvagn
er rétt að nema staðar og herða keðjurn-
ar. Ef snerting virðist enn eiga sér stað
skal hægja aksturinn þar til hljóðið þagn-
ar. Takið keðjurnar niður um leið og
komið er á rudda og snjólausa vegi.
VIÐVÖRUN - Uppsetning á
keðjum
Þegar snjókeðjur eru settar upp skal
leggja ökutækinu á sléttum fleti fjarri
umferð. Kveikið á viðvör-
unarljósum ökutækisins og setjið
þríhyrningslaga viðvörunarskilti upp
fyrir aftan ökutækið, ef það er
tiltækt. Hafið ökutækið ævinlega í
stöðuhemli og drepið á vélinni áður
en snjókeðjur eru settar upp.
VIÐVÖRUN - Keðjur á
hjólbarða
Notkun keðja getur skert aksturs-
eiginleika ökutækisins.
Akið ekki hraðar en 30 km/klst.
eða samkvæmt ráðlögðum
hámarkshraða framleiðanda keðj-
anna, hvort sem reynist lægra.
Akið gætilega og sneiðið hjá
þúst- um, holum, kröppum
beygjum og öðrum hættum á
veginum, sem gætu valdið
hristingi ökutækisins.
Forðist krappar beygjur eða
læsta hemlun.
VARÚÐ
Séu snjókeðjur af rangri stærð
eða rangt upp settar geta þær
valdið skemmdum á hemlalögn,
fjöðrun, yfirbyggingu og hjólum
ökutækisins.
Hvenær sem hljóð bendir til þess
að keðjurnar sláist við ökutækið
skal stöðva akstur og herða keðj-
urnar.
Appendix
189
Le difficili condizioni atmosferiche
dell'inverno determinano una maggiore
usura e altri problemi.
Per limitare i problemi della guida
invernale, seguire i seguenti
suggerimenti:
Fondo stradale innevato o
ghiacciato
Per la guida del veicolo su neve
profonda, possono essere necessari gli
pneumatici da neve oppure l'installazione
delle catene da neve. In caso di impiego
di pneumatici da neve, sceglierli delle
stesse dimensioni e tipo di quelli in
dotazione sul veicolo. L'inosservanza di
queste indicazioni potrebbe
compromettere la sicurezza e la
guidabilità del veicolo. Inoltre, guida ad
alta velocità, rapide accelerazioni,
improvvise frenate, e curve strette sono
potenzialmente molto pericolose.
In fase di decelerazione, usare per
quanto più possibile il freno motore.
L'improvvisa applicazione dei freni su
fondi innevati o ghiacciati può essere
causa di slittamenti. Occorre mantenere
una distanza adeguata tra il proprio
veicolo e quelli che lo precedono. Agire
inoltre delicatamente sul pedale del
freno. Si osservi inoltre che l'installazione
delle catene da neve sugli pneumatici
fornisce una maggiore trazione, ma non
evita gli slittamenti laterali.
NOTA
L'uso delle catene è vietato in alcuni
paesi. Verificare le normative locali
prima di montare le catene.
Pneumatici da neve
Se si montano pneumatici da neve sul
proprio veicolo, sincerarsi che siano di
tipo radiale e con le stesse dimensioni ed
indice di carico degli pneumatici originali.
Montare gli pneumatici da neve su tutte e
quattro le ruote in modo da bilanciare il
comportamento del veicolo in tutte le
condizioni atmosferiche. Ricordarsi che
la trazione fornita dagli pneumatici da
neve su strada asciutta può non essere
pari a quella assicurata dagli pneumatici
montati all'origine sul veicolo. È
necessario guidare con cautela anche
quando le strade sono sgombre.
Consultare il rivenditore degli pneumatici
per la velocità massima raccomandata.
Non montare pneumatici chiodati senza
aver prima controllato che il loro utilizzo
sia consentito dalle vigenti leggi locali.
GUIDA INVERNALE (ITALIAN)
ATTENZIONE - Dimensioni
degli pneumatici da neve
Gli pneumatici da neve devono
essere delle stesse dimensioni e
dello stesso tipo di quelli d'origine
del veicolo. Viceversa, si potrebbe
influire negativamente sulla
sicurezza e sulla maneggevolezza
del veicolo.
1VQA3005
919
Appendix
Catene da neve
Dato che i fianchi degli pneumatici radiali
sono più sottili, essi si potrebbero
danneggiare montando su di essi alcuni
tipi di catene da neve. Pertanto è
consigliabile usare gli pneumatici da
neve anziché le catene. Non montare
catene da neve sui veicoli equipaggiati
con cerchi in lega d'alluminio dato che
potrebbero venire danneggiati dalle
catene da neve. Se occorre montare le
catene, accertarsi che il loro spessore
sia inferiore a 15 mm. Eventuali danni al
veicolo dovuti all'uso di catene da neve
non idonee non sono coperti dalla
garanzia del veicolo.
Montare le catene da neve sulle ruote
motrici come indicato di seguito.
2WD : Ruote anteriori
4WD : Tutte e quattro le ruote
Se non si dispone di un set di
catene completo per un veicolo
4WD, installare le catene sulle
sole ruote anteriori.
AVVERTENZA
Sincerarsi che le catene da neve
siano delle dimensioni e del tipo
corretto per gli pneumatici.
Catene da neve non corrette
possono causare danni alla
carrozzeria ed alle sospensioni
che potrebbero non essere
coperti dalla garanzia del
produttore. Inoltre, i ganci di
chiusura delle catene possono
danneggiarsi al contatto con i
componenti del veicolo causando
il distacco delle catene dalle
ruote. Accertarsi che le catene da
neve siano certificate SAE classe
"S".
Per sicurezza, controllare sempre
la corretta e solida installazione
delle catene, dopo aver percorso
0,5-1 km. Riserrare o rimontare le
catene se risultano allentate.
1VQA3007
Appendix
209
Montaggio delle catene
Quando si montano le catene, seguire le
istruzioni del loro produttore e montarle il
più strettamente possibile. A catene
installate procedere lentamente. Se si
sente che le catene urtano contro la
carrozzeria o il telaio, fermarsi e
stringerle. Se il problema permane,
rallentare fino alla sua scomparsa.
Rimuovere le catene quanto prima
possibile, non appena la strada è
sgombera dalla neve.
ATTENZIONE - Catene da
neve
L'uso delle catene può influire
negativamente sulla
maneggevolezza del veicolo.
Non superare la velocità di 30
km/h o, se fosse minore, la
velocità limite raccomandata dal
produttore delle catene.
Guidare con cautela ed evitando
buche, gibbosità, curve strette ed
altre asperità stradali che
potrebbero far sobbalzare il
veicolo.
Evitare le sterzate strette o le
frenate a ruote bloccate.
AVVERTENZA
Catene di dimensioni non
corrette o installate in modo
errato possono causare danni
alle tubazioni dei freni, alle
sospensioni ed alle ruote.
Fermarsi e riserrare le catene
quando si sente che urtano
contro il veicolo.
ATTENZIONE - Montaggio
delle catene
Quando si montano le catene,
parcheggiare il veicolo su una
superficie piana e lontana dal
flusso del traffico. Attivare i
lampeggiatori d'emergenza e, se
disponibile, disporre il triangolo
d'emergenza dietro la vettura.
Prima di montare le catene,
posizionare sempre il cambio su P
(Parcheggio), inserire il freno di
stazionamento e spegnere il
motore.
921
Appendix
Værforholdene om vinteren er mer
krevende og resulterer i større slitasje og
andre problemer. Du bør følge disse
rådene for å minimere problemene med
vinterkjøring:
Snø- eller isforhold
Det kan være nødvendig å bruke
vinterdekk eller å sette på snøkjettinger
hvis du skal kjøre i dyp snø. Hvis du må
bruke vinterdekk, er det nødvendig å
velge dekk med tilsvarende størrelse og
type som de originalmonterte dekkene.
Hvis du ikke gjør det, kan det virke
negativt inn på sikkerhet og håndtering
av bilen. Videre vil kjøring med høye
hastigheter, raske akselerasjoner,
plutselig bremsing og skarpe svinger
være mulige store faremomenter.
Bruk motorbremsing i størst mulig
utstrekning når du skal senke farten.
Plutselig bremsing på snø- eller islagt vei
kan føre til at du sklir. Du må holde
tilstrekkelig avstand mellom bilene foran
og bak deg. Bruk også bremsene
forsiktig. Det bør også nevnes at
snøkjettinger gir bedre veigrep for å drive
bilen, men vil ikke hindre at du sklir
sideveis.
MERK
Snøkjettinger er ikke tillatt i alle land.
Kontroller de nasjonale reglene før du
monterer snøkjettinger.
Vinterdekk
Hvis du setter på vinterdekk på bilen din,
må det være radialdekk med samme
dimensjon og lasteevne som de originale
dekkene. Monter vinterdekk på alle fire
hjulene slik at kjøreegenskapene
balanseres for alle værforhold. Husk på
at veigrepet med vinterdekk ikke alltid er
like stort som med de originalmonterte
dekkene. Du bør kjøre forsiktig selv om
veien er bar. Kontroller med
dekkforhandleren vedrørende maksimale
hastighetsanbefalinger.
Du må ikke montere piggdekk uten først
å kontrollere de lokale, nasjonale eller
regionale forskriftene for mulige
restriksjoner for bruk.
KJØRE OM VINTEREN (NORWEGIAN)
ADVARSEL - Dimensjon
på vinterdekk
Vinterdekk må være av tilsvarende
dimensjon og type som bilens
standarddekk. Ellers kan sikkerhet
og håndtering av bilen bli påvirket i
negativ retning.
1VQA3005
Appendix
229
Snøkjettinger
Da sideveggene på radialdekk er tynnere,
kan de bli ødelagt ved montering av noen
typer snøkjettinger. Vi anbefaler derfor å
bruke vinterdekk i stedet for snøkjettinger.
Monter ikke snøkjettinger på biler som er
utstyrt med aluminiumsfelger, da
kjettingene kan skade felgene. Hvis du
må bruke snøkjettinger, bruk kjettinger
med en tykkelse på mindre enn 15 mm
(0,59 tommer). Skader på bilen som
skyldes feil bruk av snøkjettinger dekkes
ikke av bilprodusentens garanti.
Når du bruker kjettinger, må du sette
dem på drivhjulene slik.
2WD : Forhjulene
4WD : Alle fire hjulene
Hvis du ikke har et fullt sett med
kjettinger tilgjengelig til bil med 4WD, kan
det monteres kjettinger bare på
forhjulene.
FORSIKTIG
Pass på at snøkjettingene er av
riktig dimensjon og type til
dekkene dine. Feil snøkjettinger
kan føre til skade på karosseriet
og hjulopphenget, og blir ikke
dekket av bilprodusentens garanti.
Krokene på snøkjettingene kan
også bli skadet hvis de treffer
komponenter på bilen, slik at
kjettingene løsner fra dekket. Pass
på at snøkjettingen er sertifisert
etter SAE-klasse "S".
Kontroller alltid at snøkjettingene
sitter riktig etter at du har kjørt ca.
0,5 til 1 km. Stram eller monter
kjettingene på nytt hvis de er
løse.
1VQA3007
923
Appendix
Montere kjettinger
Når du monterer kjettinger, må du følge
produsentens instruksjoner og montere
dem så stramt som mulig. Kjør sakte med
snøkjettinger. Stopp og stram kjettingene
hvis du hører at de treffer karosseriet
eller chassiset. Hvis de fremdeles tar
inntil, senk farten til det stopper. Ta av
kjettingene så snart du begynner å kjøre
på bar vei.
ADVARSEL - Montere
kjettinger
Parker bilen på flat mark og ute av
trafikken når du skal montere
snøkjettinger. Sett på nødblinklyset
og sett opp en varseltrekant bak
bilen. Sett alltid bilen i P (parkering),
sett på parkeringsbremsen og slå
av motoren, før du monterer
snøkjettingene.
FORSIKTIG
Kjettinger med feil størrelse eller
som ikke er riktig montert, kan
skade bilens bremseledninger,
hjuloppheng, karosseri og felger.
Stopp kjøringen og stram
kjettingene hver gang du kan
høre at de treffer bilen.
ADVARSEL - Snøkjettinger
Bilen kan bli vanskelig å håndtere
når du bruker kjettinger.
Kjør ikke fortere enn 30 km/t eller
kjettingprodusentens anbefalte
hastighet, det som måtte være
lavest.
Kjør forsiktig og unngå humper,
hull, skarpe svinger og andre
faremomenter som kan få bilen til
å gynge.
Unngå skarpe svinger og
bremsing med låste hjul.
Appendix
249
Surowe warunki pogodowe zimą
powodują większe zużycie pojazdu i inne
problemy. Aby zminimalizować problemy
związane z jazdą w zimie, postępuj
zgodnie z poniższymi sugestiami:
Jazda w warunkach śniegowych i
przy oblodzeniu
Aby prowadzić pojazd w głębokim
śniegu, może okazać się niezbędne
użycie opon zimowych lub
zainstalowanie łańcuchów śniegowych.
Jeśli potrzebne okażą się opony zimowe,
konieczne jest wybranie opon o
rozmiarze i typie odpowiadających
oponom, w jakie pojazd był pierwotnie
wyposażony. Jeśli założone zostaną
nieodpowiednie opony, będzie to miało
negatywny wpływ na bezpieczeństwo i
prowadzenie pojazdu. Ponadto jazda z
nadmierną prędkością, gwałtowne
przyspieszanie, nagłe hamowanie i ostre
skręty będą stanowiły potencjalnie
bardzo duże niebezpieczeństwo.
Podczas zwalniania należy w pełni
wykorzystać hamowanie silnikiem. Nagłe
hamowanie na zaśnieżonej lub
oblodzonej drodze może spowodow
poślizg pojazdu. Należy utrzymywać
odpowiedni odstęp od pojazdu jadącego
z przodu. Hamulców należy używ
ostrożnie. Należy pamiętać, że założenie
łańcuchów śniegowych zapewni większą
siłę napędową, ale nie zapobiegnie
ślizganiu się na boki.
UWAGA
Stosowanie łańcuchów śniegowych nie
jest zgodne z prawem we wszystkich
krajach. Przed założeniem łańcuchów
śniegowych należy sprawdzić przepisy
danego kraju.
JAZDA ZIMĄ (POLISH)
1VQA3005
925
Appendix
Opony zimowe
Kiedy zakładane są opony zimowe,
należy upewnić się, że są to opony
radialne o takim samym rozmiarze i
zakresie obciążeń co pierwotne opony
pojazdu. Opony zimowe należy zakładać
na wszystkie cztery koła pojazdu, by we
wszystkich warunkach pogodowych
pojazd pozwalał się prowadzić
równomiernie. Należy pamiętać, że
przyczepność zapewniana przez opony
zimowe na suchej drodze może nie być
równie wysoka jak przyczepność
pierwotnych opon pojazdu. Pojazd
należy prowadzić ostrożnie nawet wtedy,
gdy drogi są oczyszczone. Aby poznać
informacje na temat zalecanych
ograniczeń prędkości dla danych opon,
należy skontaktować się ze sprzedawcą
opon.
Opon okolcowanych nie należy zakładać
bez uprzedniego sprawdzenia w
przepisach lokalnych, stanowych i
miejskich, czy na ich użycie nie są
nałożone ograniczenia.
Łańcuchy śniegowe
(przeciwpoślizgowe)
Ponieważ ścianki boczne opon radialnych
są cieńsze, założenie niektórych rodzajów
łańcuchów śniegowych może
spowodować ich uszkodzenie. Z tego
względu zaleca się korzystanie z opon
zimowych zamiast łańcuchów
śniegowych. Łańcuchów śniegowych nie
należy zakładać w pojazdach, które są
wyposażone w felgi aluminiowe, ponieważ
mogą one powodować uszkodzenia felg.
Jeśli użycie łańcuchów śniegowych jest
niezbędne, należy zastosować łańcuchy
drutowe o grubości poniżej 15 mm.
Uszkodzenia pojazdu spowodowane
użyciem niewłaściwych łańcuchów
śniegowych nie jest objęte gwarancją
producenta pojazdu.
OSTRZEŻENIE
- Rozmiar opon zimowych
Opony zimowe powinny mieć
rozmiar i typ odpowiadający
standardowym oponom pojazdu.
Jeśli tak nie jest, może to mieć
negatywny wpływ na
bezpieczeństwo i prowadzenie
pojazdu.
1VQA3007
Appendix
269
Kiedy korzysta się z łańcuchów
przeciwpoślizgowych na koła, należy je
założyć na koła napędowe, jak
następuje.
2WD: Na koła przednie
4WD: Na wszystkie koła
Jeśli nie mamy pełnego kompletu
łańcuchów na wszystkie koła dla pojazdu
4WD, można je zainstalować tylko na
kołach przednich.
Zakładanie łańcuchów śniegowych
Zakładając łańcuchy śniegowe należy
postępować zgodnie z instrukcjami
podanymi przez producenta. Łańcuchy
należy założyć tak ciasno, jak to tylko
możliwe. Kiedy łańcuchy są już założone,
pojazd należy prowadzić powoli. Jeśli
dadzą się słyszeć dźwięki świadczące o
tym, że łańcuchy stykają się z
nadwoziem lub podwoziem, należy
zatrzymać samochód i zacisnąć je. Jeśli
łańcuchy wciąż stykają się z elementami
pojazdu, należy zmniejszać prędkość, aż
łańcuchy przestaną uderzać w
samochód. Łańcuchy należy zdjąć jak
tylko rozpocznie się jazdę po
oczyszczonej drodze.
OSTROŻNIE
Należy upewnić się, że łańcuchy
śniegowe mają odpowiedni
rozmiar i typ dla opon pojazdu.
Zastosowanie niewłaściwych
łańcuchów śniegowych może
spowodować uszkodzenie
nadwozia oraz zawieszenia, a
zniszczenia powstałe w ten
sposób mogą nie być objęte
gwarancją producenta pojazdu.
Ponadto, haczyki łączące
łańcuchów śniegowych mogą
zostać zniszczone na skutek
stykania się z elementami
samochodu, co może
spowodować zsunięcie się
łańcuchów z opon. Należy
upewnić się, że łańcuchy
śniegowe są klasy “S” SAE i
posiadają certyfikat.
Po przejechaniu ok. 0,5 do 1 km
(0,3 do 0,6 mil), dla zachowania
bezpieczeństwa, należy zawsze
sprawdzić, czy łańcuchy
śniegowe zostały poprawnie
założone. Jeśli łańcuchy
poluzowały się, należy je
zacisnąć lub założyć ponownie.
927
Appendix
OSTRZEŻENIE
- Zakładanie łańcuchów
śniegowych
Aby założyć łańcuchy śniegowe,
należy zatrzymać pojazd na
płaskim podłożu, z dala od ruchu
drogowego. Włączyć światła
awaryjne pojazdu i umieścić za nim
trójkąt ostrzegawczy, jeśli jest on
dostępny. Zanim rozpocznie się
instalowanie łańcuchów
śniegowych dźwignię zmiany
biegów należy zawsze umieścić w
położeniu P (Postój), zaciągnąć
hamulec postojowy i wyłączyć
silnik.
OSTRZEŻENIE - Łańcuchy
śniegowe
Użycie łańcuchów śniegowych
może mieć negatywny wpływ na
prowadzenie pojazdu.
Pojazdu nie należy prowadzić
szybciej niż 30 km/h (20 mil/h) lub
z prędkością większą, niż
zalecana przez producenta,
którakolwiek z tych wartości
okaże się mniejsza.
Pojazd należy prowadzić
ostrożnie i unikać wybojów, dziur,
ostrych skrętów i innych
zagrożeń drogowych, które mogą
powodować podskakiwanie
pojazdu.
Należy unikać ostrych zakrętów
lub hamowania z zablokowanymi
kołami.
OSTROŻNIE
Łańcuchy o niewłaściwym
rozmiarze lub niepoprawnie
założone mogą uszkodzić linki
hamulcowe pojazdu, zawieszenie,
nadwozie oraz koła.
• Za każdym razem, kiedy da się
usłyszeć, że łańcuchy uderzają w
samochód, należy zatrzymać się i
zacisnąć je.
Appendix
289
As condições climatéricas mais agrestes
do Inverno podem resultar num maior
desgaste e noutros problemas. Para
minimizar os problemas da condução no
Inverno, siga as seguintes sugestões:
Piso com neve ou gelo
Para conduzir o veículo sobre neve alta,
poderá ter de utilizar pneus de neve ou
de instalar correntes nos pneus. Se tiver
de utilizar pneus de neve, escolha pneus
de tamanho e tipo equivalentes aos dos
pneus do equipamento de origem. Caso
contrário, pode comprometer a
segurança e a maneabilidade do seu
veículo. Além disso, a condução a alta
velocidade, as acelerações rápidas, as
travagens bruscas e as viragens
acentuadas são práticas potencialmente
muito perigosas.
Para desacelerar, trave ao máximo com
o motor. As travagens bruscas em
estradas com neve ou gelo podem dar
origem a derrapagens. Mantenha
sempre uma distância de segurança
suficiente entre o seu veículo e o que
segue à sua frente. Aplique também os
travões com cuidado. Convém referir que
a instalação de correntes nos pneus
permite explorar mais força motriz, mas
não impede as derrapagens.
NOTA
As correntes para pneus não são legais
em todos os Estados. Informe-se as leis
em vigor antes de instalar as correntes.
Pneus de neve
Se colocar pneus de neve no seu
veículo, certifique-se de que se trata de
pneus radiais com o mesmo tamanho e
capacidade de carga dos pneus de
origem. Coloque pneus de neve nas
quatro rodas para equilibrar a
maneabilidade do veículo em quaisquer
condições climatéricas. Lembre-se que a
tracção permitida pelos pneus de neve
em estradas secas poderá não ser tão
elevada como a dos pneus do
equipamento de origem do veículo.
Conduza com cuidado mesmo que as
estradas se apresentem livres de neve e
gelo. Para se informar sobre a
velocidade máxima recomendada,
contacte o concessionário que lhe
forneceu os pneus.
CONDUÇÃO NO INVERNO (PORTUGUESE)
AVISO - Tamanho dos
pneus de neve
Os pneus de neve devem ser de
tamanho e tipo equivalentes aos
dos pneus de série do veículo.
Caso contrário, pode comprometer
a segurança e a maneabilidade do
seu veículo.
1VQA3005
929
Appendix
Não instale pneus com pernos sem se
informar primeiro da existência ou não
de regulamentos municipais ou
nacionais que restrinjam a sua utilização.
Correntes para pneus
Dada a menor espessura das faixas
laterais dos pneus radiais, estes podem
danificar-se com a instalação de certos
tipos de correntes para a neve. Assim,
recomenda-se a utilização de pneus de
neve em vez de correntes. Não coloque
correntes nos pneus de veículos
equipados com rodas de alumínio, pois
as correntes podem danificar as rodas.
Se tiver de utilizar correntes, utilize
correntes de arame com uma espessura
inferior a 15 mm. A colocação de
correntes incorrectas pode causar danos
no veículo que não serão cobertos pela
garantia do fabricante.
2WD : Rodas dianteiras
4WD : Nas quatro rodas
Se não existir um conjunto
completo de correntes para
veículos 4x4, pode colocar as
correntes apenas nas rodas
dianteiras.
1VQA3007
CUIDADO
Certifique-se de que as correntes
para a neve são do tamanho e do
tipo adequados para os seus
pneus. A colocação de correntes
incorrectas pode causar danos
na carroçaria e na suspensão do
veículo que não serão cobertos
pela garantia do fabricante. De
igual modo, os ganchos de
fixação das correntes podem
danificar-se em contacto com os
componentes do veículo, fazendo
com que as correntes fiquem
lassas no pneu. Certifique-se de
que instala correntes certificadas
SAE classe "S".
Inspeccione sempre a instalação
das correntes para verificar o seu
ajustamento seguro aos pneus
depois de percorrer aproxima
-
damente 0,5 a 1 km. Se elas
estiverem lassas, volte a apertar
ou a colocar as correntes.
Appendix
309
Instalação das correntes
Para instalar as correntes, siga as
instruções do fabricante e coloque-as o
mais justo possível aos pneus. Conduza
devagar com correntes instaladas. Se
ouvir as correntes a tocarem na
carroçaria ou no chassis, pare o veículo
e aperte-as. Se continuar a ouvir o
mesmo ruído, abrande até ele parar.
Assim que entrar em estradas sem neve
nem gelo, retire as correntes.
AVISO - Correntes para
pneus
A utilização de correntes pode
prejudicar a maneabilidade do
veículo.
Não ultrapasse os 30 km/h ou o
limite de velocidade
recomendado pelo fabricante das
correntes, consoante for o mais
baixo.
Conduza com cuidado e evite as
irregularidades, buracos,
viragens acentuadas e outros
perigos da estrada passíveis de
fazer saltar o veículo.
Evite as curvas acentuadas ou
travagens passíveis de bloquear
as rodas.
AVISO - Colocação das
correntes
Para colocar as correntes,
estacione o veículo num local
plano e afastado do trânsito.
Acenda as luzes de sinalização de
perigo e coloque o triângulo de pré-
sinalização de perigo atrás do
veículo. Antes de instalar as
correntes, coloque sempre a caixa
do veículo na posição "P"
(Estacionamento), engate o travão
de estacionamento e desligue o
motor.
CUIDADO
A utilização de correntes com o
tamanho incorrecto ou mal
colocadas pode danificar as
maxilas dos travões, a
suspensão, a carroçaria e as
rodas do veículo.
Pare de conduzir e volte a apertar
as correntes sempre que as ouvir
bater no veículo.
708


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Hyundai Grand Santa Fe 2013 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Hyundai Grand Santa Fe 2013 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 14,16 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info